optix osn 1500 v100r008 product description
TRANSCRIPT
Product Description
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Issue 02
Date 2008-03-29
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 2 of 243
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service.
Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 3 of 243
About This Document
Author
Prepared by Date
Reviewed by Date
Approved by Date
Summary
This document includes:
Chapter Details
1 Network Application Describes the OptiX OSN 1500 and its position in the network.
2 Function This chapter generally describes the features of the OptiX OSN 1500 in the terms of capacity, interface, built-in WDM technology, ROP system, REG, protection, TCM and network management.
3 Hardware Describes the mechanical structure and the adaptable cabinet installation of the OptiX OSN 1500.
4 Software Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN 1500. It includes intelligent software, board software, NE software and NM software.
5 Data Features Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of the OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of function, application and protection.
6 DCN Features This chapter describes the DCN feature supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
7 ASON Features This chapter introduces the ASON features of the OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of service classes and application.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 4 of 243
Chapter Details
8 Protection Describes protection modes (including equipment level and network level) and characteristics supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
9 Clock This chapter describes the clock function of the OptiX OSN 1500.
10 OAM This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of maintenance and centralized management.
11 Security Management
This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of safe operation.
12 Technical Specifications
This chapter describes the interface specifications, transmission performance and environment requirements for the OptiX OSN 1500.
A Compliant Standards
This appendix lists international standards to which the OptiX OSN 1500 conforms in terms of design and performance.
B Basic Principle This appendix lists the basic principle of several technologies which the OptiX OSN 1500 adopts.
C Glossary This appendix lists the terms used in this document.
D Acronyms and Abbreviations
The appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this document.
History
Issue Details Date Author Approved by
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 5 of 243
Contents
1 Network Application .....................................................................................................11
2 Function.........................................................................................................................15
2.1 Capacity ......................................................................................................................................... 15
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity........................................................................................................ 15
2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity ............................................................................................................. 15
2.2 Service ........................................................................................................................................... 18
2.2.1 SDH Services ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.2.2 PDH Services ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.2.3 Ethernet Services .................................................................................................................. 18
2.2.4 RPR Services ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.2.5 ATM Services......................................................................................................................... 19
2.2.6 DDN Services ........................................................................................................................ 19
2.2.7 SAN Services ........................................................................................................................ 19
2.2.8 Service Access Capacity ....................................................................................................... 19
2.3 Interface ......................................................................................................................................... 20
2.3.1 Service Interfaces.................................................................................................................. 20
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces.................................................................................. 21
2.4 Networking ..................................................................................................................................... 22
2.5 Built-in WDM Technology ............................................................................................................... 24
2.6 External Clock Output Shutdown Function .................................................................................... 25
2.7 110 V/220 V Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 25
2.8 REG Function................................................................................................................................. 25
2.9 Protection ....................................................................................................................................... 27
2.9.1 Equipment Level Protection................................................................................................... 27
2.9.2 Network Level Protection....................................................................................................... 27
2.10 ASON Features ............................................................................................................................ 28
2.11 TCM .............................................................................................................................................. 28
2.12 E13/M13 Function ........................................................................................................................ 29
2.13 RPR.............................................................................................................................................. 29
2.14 ETH-OAM..................................................................................................................................... 30
2.15 Software Package Loading .......................................................................................................... 30
2.16 Hot Patch...................................................................................................................................... 31
2.17 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression .................................................................................................... 31
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 6 of 243
2.18 PRBS Function............................................................................................................................. 32
2.19 Board Version Replacement ........................................................................................................ 32
2.20 DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces ........................................... 33
2.21 NSF Function ............................................................................................................................... 34
2.22 OAM Information Interworking ..................................................................................................... 34
2.23 Clock ............................................................................................................................................ 35
3 Hardware .......................................................................................................................37
3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 37
3.2 Cabinet ........................................................................................................................................... 37
3.3 OptiX OSN 1500A Subrack ............................................................................................................ 39
3.3.1 Structure ................................................................................................................................ 39
3.3.2 Slot Allocation ........................................................................................................................ 40
3.3.3 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................... 47
3.4 OptiX OSN 1500B Subrack............................................................................................................ 48
3.4.1 Structure ................................................................................................................................ 48
3.4.2 Slot Allocation ........................................................................................................................ 49
3.4.3 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................... 59
3.5 Boards ............................................................................................................................................ 59
3.5.1 Board Type ............................................................................................................................ 59
3.5.2 SDH Processing Boards........................................................................................................ 62
3.5.3 PDH Processing Boards........................................................................................................ 63
3.5.4 DDN Processing Boards........................................................................................................ 65
3.5.5 Data Processing Boards........................................................................................................ 65
3.5.6 WDM Boards ......................................................................................................................... 67
3.5.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards........................................................................................... 68
3.5.8 Auxiliary Boards..................................................................................................................... 69
4 Software.........................................................................................................................71
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 71
4.2 Board Software............................................................................................................................... 72
4.3 NE Software ................................................................................................................................... 72
4.4 T2000 System ................................................................................................................................ 73
4.5 ASON Software .............................................................................................................................. 74
5 Data Features ................................................................................................................77
5.1 Ethernet Features........................................................................................................................... 77
5.1.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................... 77
5.1.2 Application ............................................................................................................................. 84
5.1.3 Protection .............................................................................................................................. 88
5.2 RPR Features................................................................................................................................. 91
5.2.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................... 92
5.2.2 Application ............................................................................................................................. 96
5.2.3 Protection .............................................................................................................................. 98
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 7 of 243
5.3 ATM Features ............................................................................................................................... 102
5.3.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................. 102
5.3.2 Application ........................................................................................................................... 104
5.3.3 Protection ............................................................................................................................ 108
5.4 SAN Features............................................................................................................................... 109
5.5 DDN Features .............................................................................................................................. 109
5.5.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................. 109
5.5.2 Application ............................................................................................................................110
5.5.3 Protection ............................................................................................................................. 111
6 DCN Features .............................................................................................................. 113
6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................113
6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN.....................................................................................................114
6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions .............................................................................................................115
6.1.3 DCC Resource Allocation Modes .........................................................................................115
6.2 HWECC.........................................................................................................................................116
6.2.1 Features................................................................................................................................116
6.2.2 Application ............................................................................................................................117
6.3 IP Over DCC .................................................................................................................................118
6.3.1 Features................................................................................................................................118
6.3.2 Application ............................................................................................................................119
6.4 OSI Over DCC.............................................................................................................................. 120
6.4.1 Features............................................................................................................................... 120
6.4.2 Application ........................................................................................................................... 120
7 ASON Features............................................................................................................123
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies ........................................................................................ 123
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links .......................................................................................... 123
7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links ................................................................................................. 125
7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration................................................................................................ 125
7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration.............................................................................. 126
7.4 ASON Clock Tracing .................................................................................................................... 127
7.5 SLA............................................................................................................................................... 130
7.6 Diamond Services ........................................................................................................................ 131
7.7 Gold Services ............................................................................................................................... 135
7.8 Silver Services.............................................................................................................................. 136
7.9 Copper Services........................................................................................................................... 138
7.10 Iron Services .............................................................................................................................. 139
7.11 Tunnels ....................................................................................................................................... 140
7.12 Service Association .................................................................................................................... 142
7.13 Service Optimization .................................................................................................................. 143
7.14 Service Migration........................................................................................................................ 143
7.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes ....................................................................................... 144
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 8 of 243
7.16 Preset Restoring Trail................................................................................................................. 145
7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail................................................................................................... 145
7.18 Equilibrium of Network Traffic .................................................................................................... 147
7.19 Shared Risk Link Group ............................................................................................................. 147
7.20 ASON Trail Group....................................................................................................................... 148
7.21 Protocol Encryption .................................................................................................................... 149
7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane ....................................................................................................... 149
8 Protection ....................................................................................................................151
8.1 Equipment Level Protection ......................................................................................................... 151
8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards.................................................................................... 151
8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect, Timing and SCC Units......................................... 152
8.1.3 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards..................................................................................... 153
8.1.4 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards ........................................................................................... 154
8.1.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit...................................................................... 154
8.1.6 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit .................................................................. 154
8.1.7 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply ............................................................. 155
8.1.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions .................................................... 155
8.2 Network Level Protection ............................................................................................................. 156
8.2.1 Linear MSP.......................................................................................................................... 156
8.2.2 MSP Ring............................................................................................................................. 157
8.2.3 SNCP................................................................................................................................... 158
8.2.4 DNI....................................................................................................................................... 163
8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection ................................................................................... 164
8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP ................................................................................................... 164
8.2.7 RPR Protection.................................................................................................................... 165
8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection ............................................................................................... 167
9 Clock ............................................................................................................................169
9.1 Clock Source ................................................................................................................................ 169
9.1.1 External Clock Source......................................................................................................... 169
9.1.2 Line Clock Source ............................................................................................................... 169
9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source ........................................................................................................ 169
9.1.4 Internal Clock Source .......................................................................................................... 170
9.2 Clock Working Mode .................................................................................................................... 170
9.2.1 Locked Mode ....................................................................................................................... 170
9.2.2 Holdover Mode .................................................................................................................... 170
9.2.3 Free-Run Mode ................................................................................................................... 170
9.3 Clock Outputs............................................................................................................................... 170
9.4 Clock Protection ........................................................................................................................... 171
9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled ........................................................................ 171
9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled ............................................................... 171
9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled .............................................................. 172
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 9 of 243
9.5 Tributary Retiming ........................................................................................................................ 173
9.5.1 Retiming Principle................................................................................................................ 173
9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function ................................................................................... 174
10 OAM ...........................................................................................................................177
10.1 Operation and Maintenance....................................................................................................... 177
10.2 Network Management ................................................................................................................ 178
11 Security Management ...............................................................................................181
11.1 Authentication Management....................................................................................................... 181
11.2 Authorization Management......................................................................................................... 181
11.3 Network Security Management .................................................................................................. 182
11.4 System Security Management ................................................................................................... 183
11.5 Log Management........................................................................................................................ 183
11.5.1 NE Security Log Management........................................................................................... 183
11.5.2 Syslog Management .......................................................................................................... 183
12 Technical Specifications ..........................................................................................185
12.1 Interface Types........................................................................................................................... 185
12.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface........................................................................................ 186
12.2.1 SDH Optical Interface........................................................................................................ 186
12.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface.................................................................................................. 190
12.2.3 ATM Optical Interface ........................................................................................................ 191
12.2.4 Laser Safety Class ............................................................................................................ 192
12.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces......................................................................................... 192
12.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface .................................................................................................... 192
12.3.2 DDN Interface.................................................................................................................... 193
12.3.3 Auxiliary Interface .............................................................................................................. 194
12.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance ....................................................................... 195
12.4.1 Clock Interface Type.......................................................................................................... 195
12.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance......................................................................... 195
12.5 Transmission Performance ........................................................................................................ 196
12.6 Timeslot Numbering ................................................................................................................... 196
12.7 Power Supply Specification........................................................................................................ 197
12.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards ............................................................................... 197
12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility.................................................................................................... 200
12.10 Safety Certification ................................................................................................................... 202
12.11 Environmental Specification ..................................................................................................... 203
12.12 Environment Requirement ....................................................................................................... 203
12.12.1 Environment for Storage.................................................................................................. 203
12.12.2 Environment for Transportation ....................................................................................... 205
12.12.3 Environment for Operation .............................................................................................. 208
A Compliant Standards ................................................................................................. 211
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 10 of 243
A.1 ITU-T Recommendations..............................................................................................................211
A.2 IEEE Standards............................................................................................................................ 213
A.3 IETF Standards ............................................................................................................................ 214
A.4 ANSI Standards............................................................................................................................ 214
A.5 Environment Related Standards .................................................................................................. 214
A.6 EMC Standards............................................................................................................................ 215
A.7 Safety Compliance Standards ..................................................................................................... 216
A.8 Protection Standards.................................................................................................................... 216
A.9 ASON Standards.......................................................................................................................... 217
B Basic Principle ...........................................................................................................219
B.1 Introduction to SDH ..................................................................................................................... 219
B.1.1 SDH Levels ......................................................................................................................... 219
B.1.2 Multiplexing Structure.......................................................................................................... 219
B.1.3 Basic Frame Structure......................................................................................................... 220
B.1.4 SOH Description ................................................................................................................. 220
B.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description............................................................................ 223
B.2 Introduction to ATM...................................................................................................................... 224
B.2.1 Introduction to ATM ............................................................................................................. 224
B.2.2 ATM Cell Structure .............................................................................................................. 225
B.3 Introduction to Ethernet ............................................................................................................... 225
B.3.1 Basic Technologies ............................................................................................................. 225
B.3.2 Ethernet Frame Structure.................................................................................................... 226
B.4 Link Aggregation .......................................................................................................................... 227
B.4.1 Concepts ............................................................................................................................. 227
B.4.2 Characteristics .................................................................................................................... 227
B.5 Introduction to MPLS ................................................................................................................... 228
B.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 228
B.5.2 Encapsulation Format ......................................................................................................... 229
B.6 QinQ Principle.............................................................................................................................. 229
B.6.1 Introduction to QinQ ............................................................................................................ 229
B.6.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure ................................................................................................ 230
C Glossary......................................................................................................................233
D Acronyms and Abbreviations....................................................................................239
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 11 of 243
1 Network Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 is new generation equipment developed by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd (hereinafter referred to as Huawei).
The OptiX OSN 1500 integrates the following technologies to transmit voice and data services on the same platform with high efficiency:
� Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
� Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
� Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)
� Ethernet
� Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)
� Storage area network (SAN)
� DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting)
� Digital data network (DDN)
� Automatically switched optical network (ASON)
There are two types of OptiX OSN 1500 system. Figure 1-1 shows the OptiX OSN 1500A and Figure 1-2 shows the OptiX OSN 1500B. The differences between the OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B lie in the appearance and access capacity.
The different features of the OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B are described in this document. If the features are not described, they still remain the same.
Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 1500A
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 12 of 243
Figure 1-2 OptiX OSN 1500B
The OptiX OSN 1500 is used at the access layer of a MAN. The OptiX OSN 1500 can also be networked with the following equipment to optimize the investment and to lower the networking costs for customers:
� OptiX OSN 9500
� OptiX OSN 7500
� OptiX OSN 3500
� OptiX OSN 3500T
� OptiX OSN 2500
� OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Figure 1-3 describes how the OptiX OSN 1500 NE is used in a transmission network.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 13 of 243
Figure 1-3 Network application of the OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 9500
Backbone
layer
OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 7500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 2500OptiX OSN 1500
Convergencelayer
Access
layer
GSM/CDMA Ethernet SANPSTN ATM. . .
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN)
EthernetStorage Area Network (SAN)
OptiX OSN 3500T
OptiX OSN 3500T
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 15 of 243
2 Function
2.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity
The CXL boards of different versions have different cross-connect capacity.
Table 2-1 lists the cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500
Cross-Connect and Timing Board
Higher Order Cross-Connect Capacity
Lower Order Cross-Connect Capacity
Access Capacity of Single Subrack
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4, Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16
20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4)
20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4, equivalent to 384 x 384 VC-3 or 8064 x 8064 VC-12)
15 Gbit/s (96 x 96 VC-4)
R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1, R1CXLQ1, R1CXLL4, R1CXLD4, R1CXLQ4, R1CXLL16
15 Gbit/s (96 x 96 VC-4)
5 Gbit/s (32 x 32 VC-4, equivalent to 96 x 96 VC-3 or 2016 x 2016 VC-12)
10 Gbit/s (64 x 64 VC-4)
2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity
The OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B have different slot access capacities. Moreover, the access capacities depend on the cross-connect and timing units.
If the cross-connect and timing units use the Q2/Q3CXL series boards, Figure 2-1 shows the access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 16 of 243
Figure 2-1 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack (Q2/Q3CXL)
XCS A XCS B
Slot20
Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6
Slot 2/12 Slot 7
Slot 3/13 Slot 8
Slot 4 Slot 9
Slot 5 Slot 102.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
PIU PIU
FAN
AUX
If the cross-connect and timing units use the R1CXL series boards, Figure 2-2 shows the access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Figure 2-2 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack (R1CXL)
Slot 20
Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6
Slot 2 Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 4
Slot 5 Slot 10
1.25Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
PIU PIU
FAN
AUX
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 9 AMU/EOW2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
Slot 3 -
In the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, slot 12 and slot 13 can be divided into half-width slots. Slot 12 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 12 and slot 2, and slot 13 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 3 and slot 13.
In case the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500A are the Q2/Q3CXL series boards:
� As full-width slots, slot 12 and slot 13 each have the access capacity of 2.5 Gbit/s.
� As half-width slots, slots 2, 3, 12 and 13 each have the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.
In case the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500A are the R1CXL series boards:
� As a full-width slot, slot 12 has the access capacity of 1.875 Gbit/s, and slot 13 has the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.
� As half-width slots, slot 2, slot 12 and slot 13 can house boards. Slot 2 has the access capacity of 622 Mbit/s, slot 12 and slot 13 each have the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.
If the cross-connect and timing units use the Q2/Q3CXL series boards, Figure 2-3 shows the access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 17 of 243
Figure 2-3 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (Q2/Q3CXL)
Slot 14 Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 1/11
Slot 2/12
Slot 3/13
Slot 4
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10 AUX Slot 5
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s
If the cross-connect and timing units use the R1CXL series boards, Figure 2-4 shows the access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Figure 2-4 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (R1CXL)
Slot 14 Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 10 AUXSlot 5
1.25Gbit/s
622Mbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
Slot 9 AMU/EOW
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
-
-
-
In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, slot 11, slot 12 and slot 13 can be divided into half-width slots. Slot 11 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 1 and slot 11; slot 12 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 2 and slot 12; and slot 13 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 3 and slot 13.
In case the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500B are the Q2/Q3CXL series boards:
� As full-width slots, slots 11–13 each have the access capacity of 2.5 Gbit/s.
� As six half-width slots, slots 1–3 and slots 11–13 each have the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.
If the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500B are the R1CXL series boards:
� As a full-width slot, slot 11 has the access capacity of 622 Mbit/s, slot 12 and slot 13 each have the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 18 of 243
� As half-width slots, slots 11-13 can house boards, and the access capacity of each slot is the same as the access capacity of a full-width slot.
2.2 Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services.
2.2.1 SDH Services
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process SDH services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following SDH services:
� Standard SDH services: STM-1/4/16
� Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c
� Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC4-Xv (X≤8), VC3-Xv (X≤24)
� SDH services with FEC: 2.666 Gbit/s
2.2.2 PDH Services
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process PDH services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following PDH services:
� E1/T1 service
� E3/T3 service
� E4 service
2.2.3 Ethernet Services
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process Ethernet services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides FE and GE interfaces to process the following Ethernet services:
� Ethernet private line (EPL) service
� Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service
� Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service
� Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service
2.2.4 RPR Services
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides FE and GE interfaces that support the resilient packet ring (RPR).
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following RPR services:
� EVPL service
� EVPLAN service
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 19 of 243
2.2.5 ATM Services
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process ATM services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following ATM services:
� Constant bit rate (CBR) service
� Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service
� Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service
� Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service
2.2.6 DDN Services
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process DDN services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following DDN services:
� N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service
� Framed E1 service
2.2.7 SAN Services
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process SAN services.
By using four independent multiservice access ports, the OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following SAN services:
� Fiber channel (FC) service
� Fiber connection (FICON) service
� Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service
� Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) service
2.2.8 Service Access Capacity
Configured with different quantity of different boards, the OptiX OSN 1500 can access services of different capacities.
The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 1500 can access varies according to the type and quantity of the configured boards. Table 2-2 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500 for accessing different services.
Table 2-2 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500
Maximum Access Capacity Service Class
OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
STM-16 standard or concatenated services
4 5
STM-16 (FEC) services 2 3
STM-4 standard or concatenated services
18 18
STM-1 standard services 42 54
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 20 of 243
Maximum Access Capacity Service Class
OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
STM-1 (electrical) services 4 18
E4 services - 8
E3/T3 services 6 27
E1/T1 services 64 190
FE services 32 56
GE services 8 12
STM-1 ATM services 8 12
STM-4 ATM services 2 3
ESCON services 8 12
FICON/FC100 services 4 6
FC200 services 2 3
DVB-ASI services 8 12
N x 64 kit/s services - 16
Framed E1 services - 16
2.3 Interface
The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Service Interfaces
Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces.
Table 2-3 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 21 of 243
Table 2-3 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Interface Description
SDH service interface
STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors
STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je (CXL16 does not provide L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je interfaces)
STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f
STM-16 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 can output fixed wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz.
PDH service interface
75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors
100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors
75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors
Ethernet service interface
10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
DDN service interface
RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1
ATM service interface
STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
E3 ATM interfaces: E3 ATM services are accessed by the N1PD3/N1PL3/PL3A board
IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the N1PQ1/N1PQM/N2PQ1/R1PD1 board
Storage area network (SAN) service interface
FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI service optical interfaces
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, Ve-4.2 are technical specifications defined by Huawei.
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces
The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
Table 2-4 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 1500.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 22 of 243
Table 2-4 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Interface Type Description
Administration One remote maintenance interface (OAM)
Four broadcast data interfaces (S1–S4)
One Ethernet interface for network management (ETH)
One commissioning interface (COM)
Orderwire interface
One orderwire phone interface (PHONE)
Clock interface Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Alarm interface Three alarm input and one alarm output interface
Four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces
Four cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfaces
2.4 Networking
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be used for several network topologies such as the ring network and the chain network.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the separate and hybrid configuration of the following types of NEs:
� Terminal multiplexer (TM)
� Add/drop multiplexer (ADM)
� Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro equipment series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.
When the equipment is interconnecting, make sure that the K bytes to be received and transmitted are on the same path at both ends.
� The OptiX OSN 1500 can be used with another OptiX OSN equipment to provide a complete ASON solution. This solution covers all the layers including the backbone layer, the convergence layer, and the access layer.
� Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX 1500 can be interconnected with the WDM equipment.
� Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 1500 can be interconnected with the OptiX Metro equipment.
Table 2-5 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 23 of 243
Table 2-5 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 1500
Networking Mode Topology
1 Chain
2 Ring
3 Tangent rings
4 Intersecting rings
5 Ring with chain
6 DNI
7 Hub
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 24 of 243
Networking Mode Topology
8 Mesh
Legends: MADM ADM TM ASON NE
2.5 Built-in WDM Technology
The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several wavelengths in one fiber.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a built-in WDM technology. The functions of the equipment are as follows:
� Any four adjacent standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 can be added or dropped.
� The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) or the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) station that adds or drops four wavelengths is supported. Concatenation is supported, and thus multiple waves can be added or dropped.
� The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692 compliant standard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, all the signals are transparently transmitted.
� Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are cascaded with other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is realized.
� The 3R (regeneration, retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for client-side uplink and downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). In the case of these client-side signals, clock recovery is available, and the signal rate can be monitored.
� Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. One board of this type can be used to realize the optical channel protection, with the protection switching time less than 50 ms.
� Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. A 1+1 inter-board standby scheme is supported, with the protection switching time less than 50 ms.
� Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which can be multiplexed or demultiplexed.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 25 of 243
� Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals over a long distance.
� Supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.
2.6 External Clock Output Shutdown Function
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the external clock output shutdown function.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the function of external clock output shutdown. The users can use the T2000 to issue a command to the cross-connect board to shut down or recover the two external T4 external clock outputs. In addition, the current configuration status of the NE software can also be queried.
When the function is performed, no external clock signals are output. When the T2000 issues a command to disable the function, the software can recover the clock output.
By default, the external clock output shutdown function is not enabled. That is, external clock signals are output by default.
2.7 110 V/220 V Power Supply
The equipment supports the input of 110 V or 220 V AC power supply. When DC power supply is not available, the equipment can still be supplied with AC power.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the 110 V/220 V power supply through an uninterrupted power module (UPM). The UPM is used to convert 110 V/220 V AC into –48 V DC, and to provide power supply for the OptiX OSN 1500.
A UPM consists of two power boxes and one storage battery, and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output power of each UPM is 2 x 270 W.
The dimensions of the power box are 438 mm (W) x 240 mm (D) x 44 mm (H).
The storage battery of the OptiX OSN 1500 has four 12 V-40 Ah battery cells, each of which measures 197 mm (W) x 165 mm (D) x 170 mm (H). If the 110 V/220 V AC power fails, the storage battery can provide power supply for four hours.
2.8 REG Function
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the board REG function.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hybrid application of REG and ADM, as shown in Figure 2-5.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 26 of 243
Figure 2-5 Hybrid application of ADM and REG
REGSL16
OptiX OSN 1500
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
SL16 SL16
IN
OUT
SL16
IN
OUT
SL16
ADM
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
SL16
OUT
IN
SL16
SL16
For details on the boards that support REG, see Table 2-6.
Table 2-6 Boards that support the REG
Valid Slot Board
OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Function
N2SL16, N3SL16
slot 12-13 slot 11-13
N2SL16A, N3SL16A
slot 12-13 slot 11-13
With the REG mode enabled, the board is in the RS loopback mode and only processes the RSOH and the frame headers.
NOTE
If the cross-connect and timing units use the R1CXL series boards, the OptiX OSN 1500 does not support the preceding boards.
For the optical interface types of these boards, see Table 2-7.
Table 2-7 REG optical interfaces
Board Optical Interface Type
N2SL16, N3SL16 L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je
N2SL16A, N3SL16A I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 27 of 243
2.9 Protection
The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.
2.9.1 Equipment Level Protection
The equipment level protection schemes include TPS protection and 1+1 protection.
Table 2-8 lists the equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 2-8 Equipment level protection
Protection Scheme Protected Object
OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Revertive Mode
E1/T1 processing board 1:1 TPS 1:N (N≤2) TPS Revertive
6 x E3/T3 processing board Not supported 1:1 TPS Revertive
4 x E4/STM-1 processing board
Not supported 1:1 TPS Revertive
Ethernet processing boards N2EFS0 and N4EFS0
Not supported 1:1 TPS Revertive
N x 64 kbit/s and framed E1 processing board
Not supported 1:N (N≤2) TPS Revertive
1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS 1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS Non-revertive Ethernet processing boards N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 DLAG DLAG � Revertive
(Default)
� Non-revertive
ATM IMA processing board 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive
Cross-connect and timing unit
1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive
SCC unit 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive
–48 V power interface unit 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive
+3.3 V board power supply 1:N backup 1:N backup Non-revertive
2.9.2 Network Level Protection
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several network level protection schemes.
Table 2-9 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 28 of 243
Table 2-9 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500
Network Level Protection Protection Scheme
Linear MSP
MSP ring
Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), subnetwork connection multi-protection (SNCMP) and subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP)
Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection
Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
SDH protection
Optical-path-shared MSP
Ethernet protection Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection
ATM protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
2.10 ASON Features
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.
The ASON features of the OptiX OSN 1500 are as follows:
� Supports automatic end-to-end service configuration.
� Supports service level agreement (SLA).
� Supports mesh networking and protection.
� Provides traffic engineering control to ensure load-balance traffic network wide and improve the bandwidth availability.
� Provides distributed mesh network protection including real-time rerouting and pre-configuration.
� Supports span protection and end-to-end service protection, improving the scalability of the network.
� Provides ASON clock tracing.
The intelligent software system can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 1500 according to the requirement. If not equipped with the intelligent software system, the OptiX OSN 1500 does not support the intelligent features described in this manual.
2.11 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.
If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the bit errors of each section.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 29 of 243
The R1CXL, N2SL16, N3SL16, N2SL16A, N3SL16A, N2SL4, N2SLD4, N2SLQ4, N2SL1, N2SLQ1 and N2SLO1 boards support the TCM at the VC-4 level.
2.12 E13/M13 Function
The E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals into one E3/T3 signal or to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals. The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the E13/M13 function.
The E13/M13 function has two modes: Transmux and Transmux Server.
These two modes are described as follows:
� The remote NE transmits the E1/E3 or T1/T3 services in VC-12/VC-3 granularities to the central NE over the SDH line.
� The central NE disassembles the received services into E1/T1 granularities.
− For E1/T1 services, the central NE directly demaps VC-12 signals into E1/T1 signals.
− For E3/T3 services, the central NE first demaps VC-3 signals into E3/T3 signals. Then, the E13/M13 function is performed to demultiplex E3/T3 signals into E1/T1 signals.
� The central NE first grooms E1/T1 signals, and then by using the E13/M13 function, aggregates and reassembles these E1/T1 signals to E3/T3 signals. Then, the E3/T3 signals are output.
− If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to the local application equipment through electrical interfaces, the mode is referred to as the Transmux mode.
− If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to anoother transmission equipment over the SDH line, the mode is referred to as the Transmux Server mode.
2.13 RPR
The RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a fiber cut or a link failure.
The main features of the RPR are as follows:
� Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real time.
� Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels.
� Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the destination node.
� Solve the fairness and congestion control problems.
� Provide RPR protection.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 30 of 243
2.14 ETH-OAM
The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission deployed services, locate network faults, and so on.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, Ethernet service processing boards provide the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. The ETH-OAM function provides a complete ETH-OAM solution to automatically detect and locate faults.
The IEEE 802.1ag ETH-OAM is realized through the following methods:
� The loopback (LB) test, which is used for a bidirectional continuity check.
� The link trace (LT) test, which is used to locate the faulty point.
� The continuity check (CC), which is used for a unidirectional continuity check.
� OAM_Ping test, which is used to test the packet loss ratio and latency in service.
The IEEE 802.3ah ETH-OAM function is realized through the following methods:
� Automatic OAM Discovery, which is used to obtain the capability for the opposite end to support the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol.
� Link performance monitoring, which is used to monitor the bit error performance of the link.
� Fault detection, which is used to report a fault to the opposite end.
� Remote loopback, which is used to locate a fault and test the link performance.
� Self-loop check, which is used to check the self-loop port.
� Loop shutdown, which is used to block a self-loop port and rectify a port loop.
2.15 Software Package Loading
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the software package loading function.
The software package loading function supports mass loading of software at NE-level and diffused loading of software at network-level. This function realizes upgrade and management of NE software, simplifies the upgrade operations, and improves the usability of the upgrade operations.
The software package loading has the following features:
� Users load the software in a uniform operation interface.
� The complete software package is stored on the compact flash (CF) card of the Q3CXL/R1CXL board. If the board software files are lost, these files can be restored from the Q3CXL/R1CXL board.
� The automatic matching and loading of software package is supported. If the software version of the in-service board does not match the software package, the board software will be automatically updated.
� The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load the files required in the current update.
� The network-level diffused loading feature realizes the synchronous software package loading on the NEs in the entire network. These NEs are configured with the same series of SCC boards.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 31 of 243
The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios:
� Upgrade of software of an NE
� Replacement of service boards
� Replacement of auxiliary boards
� Replacement of the Q3CXL or R1CXL board
� Replacement of the CF card of the Q3CXL or R1CXL board
2.16 Hot Patch
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hot patch technology.
Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located or a new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old codes with new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or realize the new requirement, without any service interruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot patch.
The hot patch technology has the following features:
� The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services.
� The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and prevents frequent software version upgrade.
� The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely. The hot patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to decrease the upgrade cost and to avoid upgrade risks.
� The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus improves the efficiency of solving problems.
2.17 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board.
When there are cross-connections between a line board and a tributary/data board, many alarms are raised on the tributary/data board if alarms are raised on the line board. These alarms are all reported to the T2000. Such a large number of alarms can disturb the troubleshooting and affect the problem solution efficiency. Therefore, the inter-board alarm suppression function is used to solve this problem.
If there are services from the line board to the tributary/data board in the same NE, and if higher order alarms are raised on the line board, relevant lower order alarms on the tributary/data board are suppressed.
If alarms are relevant to the tributary/data board only (which means the line board at the service source does not generate higher order alarms), the alarms on the tributary/data board are not suppressed. In this case, these alarms are reported to the T2000 and are not mistakenly suppressed.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 32 of 243
2.18 PRBS Function
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function.
The PRBS function is mainly used for network self-test and maintenance. An NE that provides the PRBS function can work as a simple device used to analyze if a service path is faulty. Such analysis can be performed for the NE and the entire network. During deployment or troubleshooting, the PRBS function realizes the test without a real test device.
The PRBS function has the following two types:
� If the PRBS function is used for lower order services, the PRBS module is integrated on a tributary board.
� If the PRBS function is used for higher order services, the PRBS module is integrated on a line board or a cross-connect board.
The PRBS function is implemented in the following process:
� For the opposite tributary or line of a path to be tested, the user issues a loopback command on the T2000.
� On the T2000, the user issues a command to enable the PRBS function for this path.
� The tributary, line, or cross-connect board performs the PRBS function and starts the statistics.
� The tributary, line, or cross-connect board reports the PRBS test result.
� The user queries the PRBS statistics result.
� The user releases the loopback of the path on the opposite tributary or line board.
2.19 Board Version Replacement
The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old version board.
This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme, and thus reduces the equipment cost and the maintenance cost.
For OptiX OSN 1500, the board version replacement function is supported by the N3SL16, N3SL16A, R2PD1, N2PQ1, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N2EGS2 and N2EFS4.
For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to the OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting.
When using the board version replacement function, note the following points:
� The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the replacement, fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For example, if an N2 version line board is used to replace an N1 version line board, AU-3 services and TCM function cannot be configured on the N2 version line board.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 33 of 243
� The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP configured.
2.20 DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces
The OptiX OSN 1500 can use external clock interfaces to transparently transmit data communication channel (DCC) information.
The Q3CXL and R1CXL boards, can provide two 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces to transmit DCC information. If this function is enabled, you should connect the external clock interface to the interface board corresponding to a tributary board, by using a cable. In this case, after DCC overhead signals enter the Q3CXL/R1CXL board, these signals are further sent, through this tributary board, into the cross-connect unit of the Q3CXL/R1CXL board. After being bound with service information, the signals are sent to any optical interface or 2 Mbit/s electrical interface for transmission. At the receive end, when the optical interface or 2 Mbit/s electrical interface receives the service that is transmitted in the aforementioned way, the receiving interface is able to extract DCC information by enabling the same function.
If there is a third-party network between networks composed of Huawei equipment, the T2000 is able to manage a remote Huawei network by using the DCC transparent transmission (through external clock interfaces) function.
As shown in Figure 2-6, the T2000 is connected to an NE in Huawei network A, and hence is able to manage Huawei network A. Huawei networks A, B and C are connected to a third-party network through NE1, NE2 and NE3 respectively. As the third-party network is in between, the T2000 cannot obtain network management information from Huawei networks B and C. If the DCC transparent transmission (through external clock interfaces) function is enabled on NE1, NE2 and NE3, however, the T2000 is able to manage Huawei networks B and C.
To enable the DCC transparent transmission (through external clock interfaces) function, the setting is required on only the NEs that are connected to the third-party network.
� On NE2 and NE3 that are respectively located in Huawei networks B and C, the DCC information in the overhead bus is sent from the external clock interface to the tributary board. After cross-connect grooming, the DCC information is sent, together with the service, through an optical interface (or a 2 Mbit/s electrical interface) for transmission.
� On NE1 in Huawei network A, when the optical interface (or the 2 Mbit/s electrical interface) receives service data transparently transmitted through the third-party network, the DCC information is extracted, and is then sent through the tributary board to the external clock interface. At last, the DCC information returns to the overhead bus.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 34 of 243
Figure 2-6 Application of DCC transparent transmission through external clock interfaces
Third-party
network
Huaweinetwork B
External clock interface
Optical interface or 2 Mbit/s
electrical interface
iManager T2000
DCC
DCC
2
3
1
Huaweinetwork C
Huaweinetwork A
External clock interface
Optical interface or 2 Mbit/s
electrical interface
External clock interface
Optical interface or 2 Mbit/s
electrical interface
2.21 NSF Function
The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the N4EFS0 and N2EFS4 boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the board software and network processor (NP) software.
In the NSF mode, the upgrade of the board software and NP software for the N4EFS0 and N2EFS4 boards can be completed after performing a warm reset of the boards. In this case, the service interruption time is less than 50 ms, which meets the carrier-class requirements.
If the two versions before and after the upgrade have significant differences, the service interruption during the NSF-mode upgrade cannot be controlled within 50 ms, and this ensures only a low service interruption time.
2.22 OAM Information Interworking
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports OAM information interworking.
Any of the following methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 1500 to transparently transmit the OAM information of the third-party equipment, or for the third-party equipment to transparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 1500.
� HWECC
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 35 of 243
� IP over DCC
� OSI over DCC
� DCC transparent transmission through 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces
2.23 Clock
The OptiX 1500 supports the clock functions.
� SSM clock protocol
� Tributary retiming
� Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input
� Line clock source
� Tributary clock source
� Three working modes are as follows:
− Tracing mode
− Holdover mode
− Free-run mode
� ASON clock tracing
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 37 of 243
3 Hardware
3.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be installed in an ETSI cabinet (300 mm or 600 mm deep) or a 19-inch standard cabinet. It can also be installed against the wall.
3.2 Cabinet
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be installed in an ETSI cabinet (300 mm or 600 mm deep) or a 19-inch standard cabinet.
Figure 3-1 shows an ETSI cabinet that is 300 mm deep.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 38 of 243
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ETSI cabinet
W
H
D
Table 3-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets.
Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 55
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 79
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 60
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 84
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 70
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 39 of 243
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) 94
NOTE
All dimensions are in mm. The following figure shows the dimensions of the width, the depth and the height.
W
H
D
Table 3-2 lists the technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets.
Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 90
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 110
3.3 OptiX OSN 1500A Subrack
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 1500A consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
3.3.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack is of a one-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area for boards, power supply area, fan area and fiber routing area.
Figure 3-2 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 40 of 243
Figure 3-2 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack
1
2
4
5
6
3
W
H
D
1. Fan area 2. Processing board area 3. Power supply area
4. Processing board area 5. Fiber routing area 6. Ear bracket
The functions of each subrack area are as follows:
� Slot area for boards: This area is used to house the boards for the OptiX OSN 1500A.
� Fan area: This area is used to house one fan module, which dissipates the heat generated by the equipment.
� Power supply area: This area is used to house two PIU boards, which are used to supply power for the equipment.
� Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers and cables in the subrack.
3.3.2 Slot Allocation
The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack has only one layer, where 12 slots are available before the division of slots.
Figure 3-3 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
Figure 3-3 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 1
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10 AUX Slot 5
CXL
CXL
EOW
Slot 11
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 41 of 243
Slots 12 and 13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack can be divided into two half-width slots. See Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack after the division of slots
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10 AUX Slot 5
CXL
CXL
EOW
Slot 12
Slot 11
Slot 13
The slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack are allocated as follows:
� Slots for integrated boards of the line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units: slots 4–5
� Slots for processing boards before the division of slots: slots 6–9 and 12–13
� Slots for processing boards after the division of slots: slots 6–9, 12–13, and 2–3
� Slot for the orderwire board: slot 9 (also for the processing board)
� Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 10
� Slots for PIU boards: slots 1 and 11
� Slots for the fan board: slot 20
Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing Boards
Table 3-3 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-3 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Slots for Processing Boards Slots for Interface Boards
Slot 12 Slots 6 and 7
Boards and Their Valid Slots
Table 3-4 lists the CXL series boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-4 CXL series boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots
Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16 1 x STM-16 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLL16 1 x STM-16 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 42 of 243
Board Full Name Valid Slots
Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4 1 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLL4 1 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLD4 2 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLQ4 4 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1 1 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLL1 1 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLD1 2 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLQ1 4 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
NOTE
a: The CXL is a board that integrates the SCC, cross-connect, timing, and line units for the OptiX OSN 1500A. It is one physical board and can be housed in slot 4 or slot 5 on the subrack. On the T2000, the Q2/Q3CXL is displayed as ECXL, GSCC and SL1/SL4/SL16, and the R1CXL is displayed as RCXL, GSCC and SLN/SLD41/SLQ41, seated in the logical slots 80–81, 82–83 and 4–5.
Table 3-5 lists the SDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-5 SDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16
1 x STM-16 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A
1 x STM-16 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 13.
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N1SF16 1 x STM-16 optical interface board (with FEC)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 43 of 243
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, N1SLQ4A
4 x STM-4 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4
2 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13
R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board (half-width)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 2–3, 6–9, and 12–13
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 12–13
N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4
1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13
R1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board (half-width)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 2-3, 6-9, 12-13
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 2, 6-8, 12-13
N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical interface board Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N2SLO1 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1
4 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13
R1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board (half-width)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 2-3, 6-9, 12-13
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 2, 6-8, 12-13
N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1
1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 12 and 13
R1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board (half-width)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 2-3, 6-9, 12-13
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 2, 6-8, 12-13
N1SEP1 2 x STM-1 line processing board Slots 12 and 13
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 44 of 243
Table 3-6 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-6 PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1PL3A (not used with the interface board)
3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N2PL3A (not used with the interface board)
3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
R1PD1(A/B) 32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm processing board (half-width)
Slots 2 and 12
R2PD1(A/B) 32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm processing board (half-width )
Slots 2 and 12
R1PL1(A/B) 16 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm processing board (half-width)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 6-9
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 6-8
N1DXA DDN service convergence and processing board
Slots 12 and 13
Table 3-7 lists the interface boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-7 Interface Boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots
R1L75S 16 x EI 75-ohm interface board (half-width)
Slots 6 and 7
R1L12S 16 x E1 120-ohm interface board (half-width)
Slots 6 and 7
Table 3-8 lists the data processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 45 of 243
Table 3-8 Data processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1EMS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N3EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparent transmission board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Slots 12 and 13
N2EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
R1EFT4 4 x FE Ethernet transparent transmission board (half-width)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 2–3, 6–9 and 12–13 (622 Mbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 2, 6–8 and 12–13 (622 Mbit/s)
N1EFT8 (not used with the interface board)
8 x FE Ethernet transparent transmission board
Slots 12–13 (622 Mbit/s)
N1EFT8A 8 x FE transparent transmission board (interfaces are available on the front panel)
Slots 12 and 13 (622 Mbit/s)
N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring processing board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 46 of 243
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N2EMR0 (not used with the interface board)
1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet processing board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing board
Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1ADQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processing board
Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 IMA processing board
Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 IMA processing board
Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1MST4 4-channel multiservice (SAN or video service) transparent transmission board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Table 3-9 lists the WDM boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-9 WDM boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1LWX Arbitrary rate access board Slots 12 and 13
TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board Slots 12 and 13
N1FIB Filter isolating board Slots 12 and 13
N1MR2A Arbitrary two-wavelength add/drop board (processing board)
Slots 12 and 13
N1MR2B Arbitrary two-wavelength add/drop board (half-width) slot 2-3, 6–9 and 12–13 (622 Mbit/s)
TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Slots 12 and 13
TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Slots 12 and 13
TN11CMR2 2-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board Slots 12 and 13
TN11CMR4 4-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board Slots 12 and 13
Table 3-10 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 47 of 243
Table 3-10 Optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1BA2 2-channel optical booster amplifier board Slots 12 and 13
N1BPA, N2BPA 1-channel amplifier and 1-channel preamplifier board
Slots 12 and 13
61COA, 62COA, N1COA
COA board Slots 101 and 102
ROP Single wavelength long-haul board (remote pumping)
Slot 103 (external)
Table 3-11 lists the auxiliary boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-11 Auxiliary boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Full Name Valid Slots
R1AMU Orderwire processing or alarm concatenation board
Slot 9
R1AUX System auxiliary processing unit Slot 10
R2AUX System auxiliary processing unit Slot 10
R1PIUA PIU board Slots 1 and 11
R1FAN Fan board Slot 20
R1EOW Orderwire communication board Slot 9
UPMa Uninterruptable power module Slot 50
a: The UPM is in case shape. On the T2000, it is displayed as CAU board seated in the logical slot
50.
3.3.3 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the subrack provide the dimensions and weight.
Table 3-12 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
Table 3-12 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
444 (W) x 262 (D) x 131 (H) 8 (with the backplane, fan and two PIU boards)
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 48 of 243
3.4 OptiX OSN 1500B Subrack
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 1500B consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
3.4.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack is of a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area for processing boards, slot area for interface boards, slot area for the auxiliary interface board, power supply area and fan area.
Figure 3-5 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
Figure 3-5 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
W
H
D
1. Interface board area 2. Power supply area 3. Fan area 4. Processing board area
5. Processing board area 6. Fiber routing area 7. Ear bracket
The functions of each subrack area are as follows:
� Slot area for interface boards: This area is used to house the tributary interface boards and Ethernet interface boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
� Slot area for processing boards: This area is used to house the line, tributary and Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
� Fan area: This area is used to house one fan module, which dissipates the heat generated by the equipment.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 49 of 243
� Slot area for the auxiliary interface board: This area is used to house the auxiliary interface board, which provides alarm interfaces, orderwire phone interface, management and maintenance interface, and clock interface.
� Power supply area: This area is used to house two PIU boards, which are used to supply power for the equipment.
� Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers and cables in the subrack.
3.4.2 Slot Allocation
The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack has two layers. The upper layer of the subrack, where four slots are present, is the slot area for the interface boards and PIU boards. The lower layer of the subrack, where ten slots are available before the division of slots (including slots 4 and 5), is the slot area for the processing boards and auxiliary boards.
Figure 3-6 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
Figure 3-6 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
Slot 14 Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
Slot 4
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10 AUX Slot 5
CXL
CXL
EOW
Slots 11-13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack can be divided. As shown in Figure 3-7, the divided slots are in the dashed area. The slots in the left portion of the original slots are slots 1-3, and the slots in the right portion of the original slots are slots 11-13.
Figure 3-7 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (after the division of slots)
Slot 14 Slot 18 PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 19 PIU
Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10 AUX Slot 5
CXL
CXL
EOW
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 13
The slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack are allocated as follows:
� Slots for integrated boards of the line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units: slots 4-5
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 50 of 243
� Slots for processing boards before the division of slots: slots 6-9 and 11-13
� Slots for processing boards after the division of slots: slots 1-9 and 11-13
� Slots for the interface boards: slots 14-17
� Slot for the orderwire board: slot 9 (also for the processing board)
� Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 10
� Slots for PIU boards: slots 18 and 19
� Slot for the fan board: slot 20
Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing Boards
Table 3-13 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-13 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Slots for Processing Boards
Slots for Interface Boards
Slots for Processing Boards
Slots for Interface Boards
Slot 2 Slot 14 Slot 3 Slot 16
Slot 7 Slot 15 Slot 8 Slot 17
Slot 12 Slots 14 and 15 Slot 13 Slots 16 and 17
The corresponding interface boards of the PD3, PL3, SEP, and SPQ4 can be housed only in slots of even numbers.
For the OptiX OSN 1500B, the boards housed in slots 12 and 7 share the same interface board housed in slot 15, and the boards housed in slots 13 and 8 share the same interface board housed in slot 17. Therefore, when you configure the boards, ensure the following:
� If slot 12 houses the N1EMS4 (used with an interface board) or R1PD1, slot 7 cannot house any board used with an interface board.
� If slot 13 houses the N1EMS4 (used with an interface board) or R1PD1, slot 8 cannot house any board used with an interface board.
Boards and Their Valid Slots
Table 3-14 lists the CXL series boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-14 CXL series boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots
Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16
1 x STM-16 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 51 of 243
Board Full Name Valid Slots
R1CXLL16 1 x STM-16 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4
1 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLL4 1 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLD4 2 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLQ4 4 x STM-4 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1
1 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLL1 1 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLD1 2 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLQ1 4 x STM-1 integrated board of the SCC, cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
NOTE
a: The CXL is a board that integrates the SCC, cross-connect, timing, and line units for the OptiX OSN 1500B. It is one physical board and can be housed in slot 4 or slot 5 on the subrack. On the T2000, the Q2/Q3CXL is displayed as ECXL, GSCC and SL1/SL4/SL16, and the R1CXL is displayed as RCXL, GSCC and SLN/SLD41/SLQ41, seated in the logical slots 80–81, 82–83 and 4–5.
Table 3-15 lists the SDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-15 SDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16
1 x STM-16 optical interface board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A
1 x STM-16 optical interface board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 52 of 243
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1SF16 1 x STM-16 outband optical interface board (with FEC)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4
4 x STM-4 optical interface board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N1SLD4, N2SLD4A, N2SLD4
2 x STM-4 optical interface board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 12-13
N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4
1 x STM-4 optical interface board
Slots 11-13
R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board (half-width)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 11-13 (up to two optical interfaces can be configured), slots 6-9 (one optical interfaces can be configured).
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 11 (one optical interfaces can be configured), slots 12-13 (up to two optical interfaces can be configured).
R1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board (half-width)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-9, 11-13
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 6-8, 11-13
N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical interface board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N2SLO1 8 x AU-3 high density access board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 12-13
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1
4 x STM-1 optical interface board
Slots 11-13
N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1
1 x STM-1 optical interface board
Slots 11-13
R1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interface board (half-width)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-9, 11-13
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 6-8, 11-13
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 53 of 243
Board Full Name Valid Slots
R1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board (half-width)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-9, 11-13
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 6-8, 11-13
N1SEP (used with the interface board)a
8 x STM-1 (e) processing board
Slots 12–13
N1SEP1 (not used with the interface board)
a
2 x STM-1 (e) processing board
Slots 11–13
a: The SEP1 board is displayed as the SEP1 or SEP on the T2000, depending on the interfacing mode of the board.
When the SEP1 provides interfaces on the front panel, it is displayed as the SEP1 on the T2000. When the SEP1 is used
with an interface board, it is displayed as the SEP on the T2000.
Table 3-16 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-16 PDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N2SPQ4 (used with the interface board)
4 x E4/STM-1 processing board Slots 12 and 13
R1PL1(A/B) (interfaces available on the front panel)
16 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm interface and processing board
Slots 6–9
N2PQ3 12 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N1PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N2PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N2PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N1PL3A (not used with the interface board)
3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 11–13
N2PL3A (not used with the interface board)
3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 11–13
N1PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 12 and 13
N1PQ1(A/B) 63 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm processing board
Slots 11–13
N2PQ1(A/B) 63 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm processing board
Slots 11–13
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 54 of 243
Board Full Name Valid Slots
R1PD1(A/B) 32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm processing board (half-width)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-8, 11-13
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 6-8, 11-13
R2PD1(A/B) 32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm processing board (half-width)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-8, 11-13
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 6-8, 11-13
N1PQM 63 x E1/T1 processing board Slots 11–13
N1DX1 DDN service access and convergence board
Slots 11-13
N1DXA DDN service convergence and processing board
Slots 11-13
Table 3-17 lists the interface boards or protection switching boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-17 Interface/protection switching boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1EU08 8 x STM-1 (e) electrical interface board
Slots 14 and 16
N1OU08 8 x STM-1 optical interface board
Slots 14 and 16
N2OU08 8 x STM-1 optical interface board
Slots 14 and 16
N1EU04 4 x STM-1 (e) electrical interface board
Slots 14 and 16
N1MU04 4 x E4/STM-1 interface board Slots 14 and 16
N1C34S 3 x 34M/45M electrical interface switching board
Slots 14 and 16
N1D34S 6 x 34M/45M electrical interface switching board
Slots 14–17
N1D75S 32 x E1/T1 75-ohm electrical interface switching board
Slots 14-17
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 55 of 243
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1D12S 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm electrical interface switching board
Slots 14-17
N1D12B 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm electrical interface board
Slots 14-17
N1DM12 DDN service interface board Slots 14-17
N1TSB8 8-channel electrical interface switching board
Slots 14 and 15
N1TSB4 4-channel electrical interface switching board
Slot 14
N1ETF8 8 x FE Ethernet electrical interface board
Slots 14–17
N1EFF8 8-channel Ethernet optical interface board
Slots 14–17
N1ETS8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface switching board
Slots 14 and 16
Table 3-18 lists the data processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-18 Data processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1EMS4 (used with the interface board)
4 x GE and 16 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EMS4 (not used with the interface board)
4 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N3EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 56 of 243
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 11 (622 Mbit/s), 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparent transmission board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 11 (622 Mbit/s), 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Slots 11–13
N2EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFS0 (used with the interface board)
8 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Slots 12–13 (622 Mbit/s)
N2EFS0 (used with the interface board)
8 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Slots 12–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N4EFS0 (used with the interface board)
8 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFT8 (not used with the interface board)
8 x 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission board
Slots 11–13 (622 Mbit/s)
N1EFT8 (used with the interface board)
16 x 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission board
Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFT8A (interfaces available on the front panel)
8 x FE transparent transmission board
Slots 11–13 (622 Mbit/s)
N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring processing board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N2EMR0 (used with the interface board)
1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet processing board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 57 of 243
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N2EMR0 (not used with the interface board)
1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet processing board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
R1EFT4 (interfaces available on the front panel)
4 x FE processing board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-9, 11-13 (622 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 6-8, 11-13 (622 Gbit/s)
N1EFF8 8-channel Ethernet optical interface board
Slots 14–17
N1ETS8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface switching board
Slots 14 and 16
N1MST4 4-channel multiservice transparent transmission board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 11 (622 Mbit/s), 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1ADQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processing board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 IMA processing board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 IMA processing board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 11-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Table 3-19 lists the WDM boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-19 WDM boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1LWX Arbitrary rate access board Slots 11–13
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 58 of 243
N1MR2A Arbitrary two-wavelength add/drop board
Slots 11–13
N1MR2B Arbitrary two-wavelength add/drop board (half-width)
Slots 1–3, 6–9 and 11–13
N1MR2C Arbitrary two-wavelength add/drop board
Slots 14–17
TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
Slots 11–13
TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
Slots 11–13
TN11CMR2 2-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board
Slots 11–13
TN11CMR4 4-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board
Slots 11–13
Table 3-20 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-20 Optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots
N1BA2 2-channel optical booster amplifier board
Slots 11–13
N1BPA, N2BPA Optical booster preamplifier board
Slots 11–13
TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board
Slots 11–13
N1FIB Filter isolating board Slots 12 and 13
61COA, 62COA, N1COA
COA board Slots 101–102
ROP Single wavelength long-haul board (remote pumping)
Slot 103 (external)
Table 3-21 lists the auxiliary boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-21 Auxiliary boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Full Name Valid Slots
R1AMU Orderwire processing or alarm concatenation board
Slot 9
R1AUX System auxiliary processing unit Slot 10
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 59 of 243
R2AUX System auxiliary interface board Slot 10
R1FAN Fan board Slot 20
R1EOW Orderwire communication board Slot 9
R1PIU PIU board Slots 18–19
UPMa Uninterruptable power module Slot 50
a: The UPM is in case shape. On the T2000, it is displayed as CAU board seated in the logical slot
50.
3.4.3 Technical Specifications
The technical specifications of the subrack provide the dimensions and weight.
Table 3-22 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
Table 3-22 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
444 (W) x 263 (D) x 221 (H) 9 (with the backplane, fan and two PIU boards)
3.5 Boards
The equipment supports different types of boards.
3.5.1 Board Type
The boards are SDH boards, PDH boards and other boards.
The OptiX OSN 1500 system takes a cross-connect matrix as the kernel and consists of the following units:
� SDH interface unit
� PDH interface unit
� Ethernet interface unit
� DDN interface unit
� ATM interface unit
� SDH cross-connect matrix unit
� Synchronous timing unit
� SCC unit
� Overhead processing unit
� Auxiliary interface unit
Figure 3-8 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500. Table 3-23 lists the constituent boards and functions of each unit.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 60 of 243
Figure 3-8 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500
STM-N opticalsignal
PDH signal
Ethernet signal
ATM signal
Cro
ss C
on
ne
ct
Ma
trix
SD
H in
terf
ace
unit
Ove
rhea
dp
rocessin
g
un
it
Syn
ch
ron
ou
stim
ing
un
it
Au
xili
ary
Inte
rfa
ce
un
it
SC
C u
nit
SD
H/P
DH
/Eth
ern
et/
AT
M/D
DN
in
terf
ace
bo
ard
Table 3-23 Boards for the OptiX OSN 1500
Unit OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Processing board N1SF16, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A, N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4, N2SLO1, N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1, N1SEP1, N1SLT1, R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1
N1SF16, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A, N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4, N2SLO1, N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1, N1SEP1, N1SEP, N1SLT1, R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1
Interface board - N1EU04, N1EU08, N1OU08, N2OU08
SDH interface unit
Protection switching board
- N1TSB8, N1TSB4
Processing board R1PD1A, R1PD1B, R2PD1A, R2PD1B, N1PL3A, R1PL1A, R1PL1B, N2PL3A
R1PD1, R2PD1, N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3, N1PL3A, N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1, R1PL1A, R1PL1B, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A
Interface board R1L12S, R1L75S N1MU04, N1D34S, N1C34S, N1D75S, N1D12S, N1D12B
PDH interface unit
Protection switching board
- N1TSB8, N1TSB4
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 61 of 243
Unit OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
Convergence processing board
N1DXA N1DX1, N1DXA DDN interface unit
Interface board - N1DM12
Processing board N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1EFS4, N2EFS4, R1EFT4, N1EFT8, N1EFT8A, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4
N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1EFS0, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N1EFS4, R1EFT4, N1EFT8, N1EFT8A, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4
Interface board - N1ETF8, N1EFF8
Ethernet interface unit
Protection switching board
- N1ETS8, N1TSB8
Processing board N2EMR0, N2EGR2 N2EMR0, N2EGR2 RPR unit
Interface board - N1ETF8, N1EFF8
ATM interface unit N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1
N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1
SAN interface unit N1MST4 N1MST4
N1MR2A, N1MR2B, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4
N1MR2A, N1MR2B, N1MR2C (seated in slots for interface boards), TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4
WDM unit
N1LWX N1LWX
Remote optical pumping unit N1FIB, ROP N1FIB, ROP
Unit that integrates the SCC, line, cross-connect and clock units
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4, Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16, R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1, R1CXLQ1, R1CXLL4, R1CXLD4, R1CXLQ4, R1CXLL16
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4, Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16, R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1, R1CXLQ1, R1CXLL4, R1CXLD4, R1CXLQ4, R1CXLL16
R1PIUA R1PIU Power interface unit
UPM (Uninterrupted Power Module)
UPM
Auxiliary interface unit AUX AUX
Orderwire unit EOW, AMU EOW, AMU
Fan unit R1FAN R1FAN
61COA, 62COA, N1COA 61COA, 62COA, N1COA
N1BPA, N2BPA N1BPA, N2BPA
Optical booster amplifier unit
N1BA2 N1BA2
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 62 of 243
Unit OptiX OSN 1500A OptiX OSN 1500B
TN11OBU1 TN11OBU1
3.5.2 SDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the SDH processing boards.
Table 3-24 lists the SDH processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 3-24 SDH processing boards
Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16
Interfaces available on the front panel
L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je
LC
N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 LC
N1SF16 Interfaces available on the front panel
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f LC
N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
N1SLT1 Interfaces available on the front panel
S-1.1 LC
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N2SLQ1 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC
N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC
R1SLD4 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
R1SL4 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
R1SLQ1 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
R1SL1 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC
N1SEP1a Interfaces available on the 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical SMB
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 63 of 243
Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
front panel interface
Interfaces available on the 4 x STM-1 line processing board N1EU04
75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface
SMB
Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1OU08
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 LC
Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N2OU08
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 SC
N1SEPa
Interfaces available on the 8 x STM-1 line processing board N1EU08
75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface
SMB
N2SLO1 Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16, R1CXLL16
b
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 LC
Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4, R1CXLL4, R1CXLD4, R1CXLQ4b
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1, R1CXLQ1b
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC
a: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are boards of the same type. If they are used with the interface board, they are displayed as
"N1SEP" on the T2000. If the interfaces on their front panels are used, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.
b: The CXL is a board that integrates the line, SCC, cross-connect, and timing units for the OptiX OSN 1500. It can be
seated in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, the CXL board is displayed as three board types: ECXL/RCXL, GSCC and
SLN/SLD41/SLQ41, seated in the logical slots 80-81, 82-83 and 4-5.
3.5.3 PDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the PDH processing boards.
Table 3-25 lists the PDH processing boards and the valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A. Table 3-26 lists the PDH processing boards and the valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-25 PDH processing boards (OptiX OSN 1500A)
Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N1PL3A Interfaces available on the front panel 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB
N2PL3A Interfaces available on the front panel 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 64 of 243
R1PD1A Interfaces available on the 16 x electrical interface switching board R1L75S
75-ohm E1 electrical interface DB44
R1PD1B Interfaces available on the 16 x electrical interface switching board R1L12S
120-ohm E1 electrical interface DB44
R2PD1A Interfaces available on the 16 x electrical interface switching board R1L75S
75-ohm E1 electrical interface DB44
R2PD1B Interfaces available on the 16 x electrical interface switching board R1L12S
120-ohm E1 electrical interface DB44
R1PL1 Interfaces available on the front panel 2mmHM 2mmHM
Table 3-26 PDH processing boards (OptiX OSN 1500B)
Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N1SPQ4 Interfaces available on the 4 x electrical interface board N1MU04
75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface
SMB
N2SPQ4 Interfaces available on the 4 x electrical interface board N1MU04
75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface
SMB
N1PD3 Interfaces available on the 6 x electrical interface switching board N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N1PL3 Interfaces available on the 3 x electrical interface switching board N1C34S
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N1PL3A Interfaces available on the front panel 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N2PQ3 Interfaces available on the 6 x electrical interface switching board N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N2PD3 Interfaces available on the 6 x electrical interface switching board N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N2PL3 Interfaces available on the 3 x electrical interface switching board N1C34S
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N2PL3A Interfaces available on the front panel 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N1PQ1A Interfaces available on the 32-channel electrical interface switching board N1D75S
75-ohm E1 interface DB44
N1PQ1B Interfaces available on the 32-channel electrical interface switching board N1D12S
120-ohm E1 interface DB44
N2PQ1A Interfaces available on the 32-channel electrical interface switching board N1D75S
75-ohm E1 interface DB44
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 65 of 243
Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N2PQ1B Interfaces available on the 32-channel electrical interface switching board N1D12S
120-ohm E1 interface DB44
N1PQM Interfaces available on the 32-channel electrical interface switching board N1D12S
120-ohm E1 interface, 100-ohm T1 interface
DB44
R1PD1A Interfaces available on the 32-channel electrical interface switching board N1D75S
75-ohm E1 interface DB44
R1PD1B Interfaces available on the 32-channel electrical interface switching board N1D12S
120-ohm E1 interface DB44
R2PD1A Interfaces available on the 32-channel electrical interface switching board N1D75S
75-ohm E1 interface DB44
R2PD1B Interfaces available on the 32-channel electrical interface switching board N1D12S
120-ohm E1 interface DB44
R1PL1 Interfaces available on the front panel 2mmHM 2mmHM
3.5.4 DDN Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports DDN processing boards.
Table 3-27 lists the DDN processing boards.
Table 3-27 DDN processing boards
Board Full Name Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N1DX1 N x 64 kbit/s service access and convergence board
Interfaces available on the N x 64 kbit/s interface board N1DM12
RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1
DB28, DB44
N1DXA N x 64 kbit/s service convergence board
None None None
3.5.5 Data Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports data processing boards.
Table 3-28 lists the Ethernet and ATM data processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A and their interfaces. Table 3-29 lists the Ethernet and ATM data processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B and their interfaces.
Table 3-28 Data processing boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500A)
Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N2EGS2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N1EFS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N2EFS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 66 of 243
N1EGT2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N1EFT8 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N1EFT8A Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100Base-TX RJ-45
R1EFT4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N1EMS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC
N1EGS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC
N3EGS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N2EMR0 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
RJ-45, LC
N2EGR2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N1ADL4 Interfaces available on the front panel S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
N1ADQ1 Interfaces available on the front panel Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, I-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC
N1IDL4 Interfaces available on the front panel S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC
N1IDQ1 Interfaces available on the front panel Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, I-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC
N1MST4 Interfaces available on the front panel X3.296/(DVB-ASI)EN50083-9, 200-M5-SN-I, 200-SM-LC-I
-
Table 3-29 Data processing boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500B)
Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
N2EGS2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
10/100BASE-TX RJ-45 N1EFS0
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
100BASE-FX LC
Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
10/100BASE-TX RJ-45 N2EFS0
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
100BASE-FX LC
Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
10/100BASE-TX RJ-45 N4EFS0
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
100BASE-FX LC
N1EFS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N2EFS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N1EGT2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 67 of 243
Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector
Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
N1EFT8
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
100BASE-FX LC
N1EFT8A Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
100BASE-FX LC
N2EMR0
Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N2EGR2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
100BASE-FX LC
N1EMS4
Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N1EGS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N3EGS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC
N1ADL4 Interfaces available on the front panel S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1ADQ1 Interfaces available on the front panel Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, I-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1IDL4 Interfaces available on the front panel S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1IDQ1 Interfaces available on the front panel Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, I-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1MST4 Interfaces available on the front panel X3.296/(DVB-ASI) EN50083-9, 200-M5-SN-I, 200-SM-LC-I
LC
R1EFT4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45
3.5.6 WDM Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports WDM boards.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 68 of 243
Table 3-30 lists the WDM boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A and their interfaces. Table 3-31 lists the WDM boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B and their interfaces.
Table 3-30 WDM boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500A)
Board Interfacing Mode Connector
N1MR2A Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1MR2B Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1LWX Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11MR2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11MR4 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11CMR2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11CMR4 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
Table 3-31 WDM boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500B)
Board Interfacing Mode Connector
N1MR2A Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1MR2B Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1MR2C Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1LWX Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11MR2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11MR4 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11CMR2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11CMR4 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
3.5.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several optical amplifier boards.
Table 3-32 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces.
Table 3-32 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces
Board Interfacing Mode Connector
N1BA2 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1BPA, N2BPA Interfaces available on the front panel LC
TN11OBU1 Interfaces available on the front panel LC
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 69 of 243
61COA Interfaces available on the front panel SC
N1COA Interfaces available on the front panel SC
62COA Interfaces available on the front panel SC, E2000
ROP Interfaces available on the front panel LC
N1FIB Interfaces available on the front panel LC, E2000
3.5.8 Auxiliary Boards
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports auxiliary boards.
Table 3-33 lists the auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-34 lists the auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-33 Auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board Connector
R1PIUA Power supply interface
R1FAN None
R1AUX RJ-45
R2AUX RJ-45
R1AMU RJ-45
R1EOW RJ-11, RJ-45
Table 3-34 Auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board Connector
R1PIU Power supply interface
R1FAN None
R1AUX RJ-45
R2AUX RJ-45
R1AMU RJ-45
R1EOW RJ-11, RJ-45
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 71 of 243
4 Software
4.1 Overview
The software system of the OptiX OSN 1500 is of a modular structure.
The software system includes the following modules:
� Board software (residing in each relevant board)
� NE software (residing in the SCC board)
� T2000 software (residing on a T2000 computer)
� ASON software (contained in the NE software)
The software system of the OptiX OSN 1500 is as shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 1500
T2000 software
Board software
NE software
ASONsoftware
� The ASON software can interact with the T2000 software directly, but it needs the NE
software to intercommunicate with the board software.
� During the software loading, the ASON software is loaded together with the NE software.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 72 of 243
4.2 Board Software
The board software runs on each board, and manages, monitors and controls the operation of the board.
The board software receives the commands issued by the NE software and reports the board status to the NE software in the form of performance events and alarms.
The board software functions include alarm management, performance management, configuration management, and communication management. The board software directly controls the functional modules in a board and implements specific NE functions that are compliant with ITU-T Recommendations. The board software provides support for the management of boards performed by the NE software.
The board software is mainly classified into the line software, the tributary software, the cross-connect software, the data board software, the clock software, and the orderwire software.
4.3 NE Software
The NE software is used to manage, monitor and control the operation of the boards of an NE. The NE software also functions as the communication unit between the T2000 system and the boards. Through the NE software, the T2000 system can control and manage NEs.
In compliance with ITU-T M.3010, the NE software belongs to the element management layer in the telecommunications management network (TMN), and provides NE functions, some coordination functions, and operations system functions at the network element layer. The data communication function implements the communication between the NE and other components (including equipment, the T2000 system, and other NEs).
The NE software consists of the following modules:
� Real-time multi-task operating system
� Network side (NS) module
� Equipment administration module (AM)
� Communication module
� Database management module
Real-Time Multi-task Operating System
The real-time multi-task operating system of the OptiX OSN 1500 NE software is responsible for the management of public resources and provides support for the execution of applications. This system provides an application execution environment that is independent of the processor hardware, to separate applications from the processor.
Network Side (NS) Module
The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment management module. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 73 of 243
the application layer) and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer.
Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:
� Qx interface module
� Command line interface module
� Security management module
Equipment Administration Module (AM)
The equipment AM is the kernel of the NE software for implementing NE management, and includes the Manager and the Agent. The Manager sends network management operation commands and receives event information. The Agent responds to the network management operation commands sent by the Manager, performs operations to managed objects, and reports events according to the status change of the managed objects.
The equipment AM includes the configuration management module, the performance management module, the alarm management module, and the MSP switching management module.
Communication Module
The communication module performs the message communication function (MCF) of the functional blocks of the transmission network equipment. Through the hardware interface provided by the SCC board, the communication module transmits the OAM&P information and exchanges management information between the T2000 system and NEs, and between NEs themselves. This module consists of the network communication module, the serial communication module, and the ECC communication module.
Database Management Module
The database management module is an integral component of the NE software, and consists of the data and the management system. The database, organized as a relational database, includes the network database, alarm database, performance database, and equipment database. The management system manages and accesses the data in the database.
4.4 T2000 System
The OptiX OSN 1500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000 transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000).
The T2000 is used as a network management system to implement a uniform management of the optical transmission network, and to maintain all the optical network equipment in the network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 74 of 243
The T2000 software manages OptiX equipment through the Qx interface, which adopts a management protocol specially designed for the OptiX equipment.
The T2000 software runs on a workstation or a PC. The T2000 enables the user not only to operate and maintain the transmission equipment, but also to manage the transmission network.
� Alarm management
The T2000 realizes the following alarm management functions: real-time collection, prompting, filtering, browsing, acknowledgement, check, clearing, counting, alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis, and fault diagnosis.
� Performance management
The T2000 realizes the setting of performance monitoring, and enables the user to browse, analyze, and print performance data. The short-term and long-term performance forecast and the performance register reset are also supported.
� Configuration management
The T2000 enables the user to configure and manage interfaces, clocks, services, trails, protections, and time.
� Security management
The T2000 realizes NM user management, NE user management, NE login management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout, and local craft terminal (LCT) access control.
� Maintenance management
The T2000 provides the loopback, board reset, automatic laser shutdown (ALS), and optical power detection, and data collection functions, to help the maintenance personnel in troubleshooting.
4.5 ASON Software
According to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON) includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.
The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the T2000. The transport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is where the ASON software is applied, and uses the LMP (link management protocol), OSPF-TE (open shortest path first- traffic engineering), and RSVP-TE (reservation protocol-traffic engineering) protocols.
Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly includes the link management module, the signaling module, the routing module, and the cross-connection management module.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 75 of 243
Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture
Cross-connection
management
module
NE
software
Signaling module
Routing module
T2000
AOSN software
LMP link management
module
Link Management Module
By using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following functions:
� Create and maintain control channels.
� Verify member links and TE links.
Signaling Module
By using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following functions:
� Set up or interrupt service connections according to user requests.
� Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.
Routing Module
By using the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:
� Collect and flood the TE link information.
� Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane.
� Compute service trails and control the routing.
Cross-Connection Management Module
The cross-connection management module provides the following functions:
� Create and delete cross-connections.
� Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 77 of 243
5 Data Features
5.1 Ethernet Features
This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN 1500.
5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet service requirements.
Table 5-1 lists the Ethernet functions of the EFS4 and EFS0 boards.
Table 5-2 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGS2 board.
Table 5-3 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGS4 and EGS4A boards.
Table 5-4 lists the Ethernet functions of the EMS4 board.
Table 5-5 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGT2, EFT8, EFT8A and EFT4 boards.
Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0
Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0
Interface 4 FE 4 FE 8 FE 8 FE 8 FE
Interface type 10Base-T, 100Base-TX 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board None None N1ETF8, N1EFF8
N1ETS8 (used with TSB8 to realize 1:1 TPS), N1ETF8, N1EFF8
N1ETS8 (used with TSB8 to realize 1:1 TPS), N1ETF8, N1EFF8
Service frame format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 78 of 243
Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0
Uplink bandwidth
4 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 8 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤12)
Number of VCTRUNKs
12 24 12 24 24
Ethernet private line (EPL)
Supported
Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)
Supported
Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN)
Supported
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN)
Not supported
Static MPLS label
MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP Supported
Multicast listening (IGMP Snooping)
Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F (Frame - Mapped GFP)
Link state pass through (LPT)
Supports P2P LPT
Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
Supports P2P LPT
Supports P2P LPT
Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
Committed access rate (CAR)
Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Intra-board link aggregation
Not supported
Supported Not supported
Supported Supported
Test frame Supported
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 79 of 243
Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0
Ethernet OAM Not supported
Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Not supported
Not supported Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
NSF Function Not supported
Supported Not supported
Not supported Supported
Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2
Function N2EGS2
Interface 2 GE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board None
Service frame format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤12)
Number of VCTRUNKs
48
EPL Supported
EVPL Supported
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Not supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP Supported
Multicast listening (IGMP snooping)
Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 80 of 243
Function N2EGS2
LPT Supports P2P LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI flow.
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame Supported
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Not supported
RMON Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation
Table 5-3 Function list of EGS4 and EGS4A
Function N1EGS4 N3EGS4
Interface 4 x GE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board None
Service frame format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9216 bytes
Uplink bandwidth
16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤24), VC-4-xv (x≤8)
Number of VCTRUNKs
64
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
EPLAN Supported
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 81 of 243
Function N1EGS4 N3EGS4
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label
Not supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported
Multicast listening (IGMP snooping)
Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT Supports P2P and P2MP LPT Supports P2P LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
BPS Supported
PPS Supported
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow.
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control Supports flow control based on GE port, in compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Test frame Supported
Link aggregation
Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and distributed link aggregation.
Table 5-4 Function list of EMS4
Function N1EMS4
Interface 4 GE and 16 FE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 82 of 243
Function N1EMS4
Interface board Supports 4 x GE if it is not used with an interface board. Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if it is used with interface boards N1ETF8 and N1EFF8.
Protection Supports 1+1 intra-board protection and port level protection.
Service frame format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame Supported, 9216 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤24), VC-4-xv (x≤8)
Number of VCTRUNKs
64
EPL Supported
EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
EPLAN Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label
Not supported
VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP Supported
Multicast listening (IGMP snooping)
Supported
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT Supports P2P amd P2MP LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
BPS/PPS Supported
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
QoS traffic classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and por+SVLAN flow.
CoS Supported
Shaping Supported
Flow control Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with IEEE 802.3x
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 83 of 243
Function N1EMS4
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Test frame Supported
Service mirroring Supported
Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and distributed link aggregation.
Table 5-5 Function list of EGT2, EFT8, EFT8A and EFT4
Function N1EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A R1EFT4
Interface 2 GE 16 FE 8 FE 4 FE
Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
10Base-T, 100Base-TX
10Base-T, 100Base-TX
Interface board None Supports 8 x FE if it is not used with an interface board. Supports 16 x FE if it is used with the N1ETF8 and N1EFF8 interface boards.
None None
Service frame Iformat In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Supported, 9600 bytes
Supported by the latter four ports, 9600 bytes
Supported, 9600 bytes
Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 4 VC-4
Mapping mode VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-xv (x≤24), VC-4-xv (x≤8)
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤3)
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤3)
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤3)
Number of VCTRUNKs
2 16 8 4
Ethernet service types Only EPL supported; EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN not supported
MPLS Not supported
VLAN Transparent transmission
Encapsulation GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 84 of 243
Function N1EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A R1EFT4
LPT Supports P2P LPT
LCAS In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Not supported
Flow control In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame Supported
Ethernet OAM Not supported
Ethernet performance monitoring
Supported
5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:
� EPL Service
� EVPL Service
� EPLAN Service
� EVPLAN Service
EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown in Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH self-healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable transmission of services.
Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port
VCTRUNK 1PORT1
PORT2
VCTRUNK 1
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
POTR1
A
NE 1 NE 2
B B
A
PORT2
OptiX OSNequipment
Enterpriseuser
EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN 1500 adopts two ways to support EVPL services.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 85 of 243
� Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of Companie A. The two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.
Figure 5-2 Port-shared EVPL services
Headquarters of
company A
NE 1 NE 2
Department 1
Department 2
OptiX OSNequipment
Enterprise
user
PORT1
PORT2
VLAN100
PORT1
VLAN100
VLAN200 VLAN200
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
� VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN 1500 adopts three ways to realize convergence and distribution of EVPL services.
− EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 5-3.
− EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 5-4.
− EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID
VCTRUNK
A A'
NE 1 NE 2
B
Community
user
Cyber cafe
user
OptiX OSN
equipment
VLAN100
VLAN200
VLAN100
VLAN200
1 PORT2 1PORT PORTPORT2
B'
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 86 of 243
Figure 5-4 EVPL service based on MPLS
Branch 1
NE 1 NE 2
Company A OptiX OSNequipment
Branch 2
DepartmentB
Department
A
Department
B
Department
A
PPE
Add label
P PE
Strip label
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1PORT1
PORT2
Figure 5-5 EVPL service based on QinQ
Branch 1
NE 1 NE 2
Company A OptiX OSNequipment
Branch 2
Department
B
DepartmentA
Department
B
Department
A
C-Aware
Add label Strip label
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1PORT1
PORT2
S-Aware S-Aware C-Aware
EPLAN Service
Though the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a bandwidth, the OptiX OSN 1500 adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets accessed select the mapping VCTRUNK according to the MAC address table, as shown in Figure 5-6.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 87 of 243
Figure 5-6 EPLAN service
Department 1of company A
NE 1 NE 2
Company A OptiX OSNequipment
NE3
Accesspoint
Port 1
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VBVB
VCTRUNK1
VB
PORT1
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
PORT1
Port 1
Port 1
Department 2of company A
Department 3
of company A
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and support for the data packets accessed into the same VLAN. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can meet the service requirements.
As shown in Figure 5-7, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 adopt VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.
Figure 5-7 EVPLAN service
NE 1 NE 2
Company A OptiX OSNequipment
NE3
Acesspoint
Port 1
LSP
VCTRUNK1
PORT1PORT2
VCTRUNK2
Department 1of company A
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
LSP LSP PORT1
PORT2
VC
TR
UN
K1
PO
RT
1P
OR
T2 VC
TR
UN
K2
C-Aware S-Aware
C-Aware
S-Aware
C-Aware
S-Aware
VB1VB1
VB1
Department 1of company B
Company B
Department 2
of company A
Department 2of company B
Port 2Port 1
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
Department 3of company A
Department 3of company B
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 88 of 243
5.1.3 Protection
OptiX OSN 1500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
The optical transmission layer supports MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The protection schemes supported at the Ethernet service layer are as follows:
� LCAS
� STP/RSTP
� Tributary protection switching (TPS)
� Board protection switching (BPS)
� Port protection switching (PPS)
� Link aggregation group (LAG)
� DLAG
� LPT
LCAS
The LCAS provides an error tolerance mechanism to enhance the reliability of the virtual concatenation function. The LCAS has the following functions:
� When the LCAS is applied in the virtual concatenation technology, the LCAS enables the configuration of system capacity, the increase and decrease of the concatenated VC quantity, and the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth (services are not damaged during the dynamic change).
� The LCAS protects and restores failed members.
As shown in Figure 5-8, the LCAS can dynamically add or delete members to increase or decrease the bandwidth. Services are not interrupted during this bandwidth adjustment.
Figure 5-8 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS
I want another 10 Mbandwidth. Member
Member Headquarters
Branch
Branch
New member
MSTP network
OptiX NE
Headquarters
Member
Member
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 89 of 243
As shown in Figure 5-9, the LCAS realizes the protection of the Ethernet service. When some members fail, the faulty members are automatically deleted, whereas other members transmit data normally. When the faulty members are available again, they are automatically restored, and the data is loaded to these members again.
Figure 5-9 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS
Member
MemberHeadquarters
Branch Failedmember
Member
MemberHeadquarters
Branch Delete failedmember
MSTP network
OptiX NE
STP/RSTP
The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. The STP or the RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology.
TPS
The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a protected board becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board. This ensures a reliable operation of the equipment.
The OSN 1500B supports one group of 1:1 TPS protection for the N2EFS0 or N4EFS0 board.
BPS
The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches all the services from the active board to the standby board to realize the service protection.
The N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support BPS.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 90 of 243
PPS
The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches the services of one or more affected ports to the standby boards. In this case, a protection switching for the entire board is not necessary.
Compared with the BPS, the PPS has lesser impact on external systems and the network.
The N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support the PPS.
LAG
A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the same equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG can be regarded as one link.
The LAG provides the following functions:
� Improves the link availability. In an LAG, members dynamically back up each other. When one link is interrupted, other members quickly replace the link to provide services.
� Adds the link bandwidth. The LAG is an economical method for the user to increase the link transmission rate. When multiple physical links are bundled, the user is able to obtain a data link of higher bandwidth, without an upgrade of the existing equipment. The capacity of an LAG is equal to the sum of the capacity of all the member links.
� Balances load. Multiple physical links in an LAG share the traffic load and back up each other.
� Improves the reliability. Members in an LAG dynamically back up each other.
The LAG has three modes: dynamic aggregation, manual aggregation, and static aggregation. For details, refer to B.4 Link Aggregation.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support link aggregation, and currently support only manual aggregation and static aggregation.
DLAG
The DLAG requires two boards. One board is the working board and the other is the protection board.
During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other ports are not switched. The equipment configured with the DLAG should be connected to the equipment where the LACP is running. When any intermediate node is between two equipment sets where the DLAG is configured, the intermediated node should support the transparent transmission of the protocol packets.
The DLAG can be of modes: revertive or non-revertive.
� Revertive mode
If the working board becomes faulty, the DLAG is switched to the protection board. When the working board is restored, the DLAG is automatically switched to the working board.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 91 of 243
� Non-revertive mode
If the working board becomes faulty, the DLAG is switched to the protection board. When the working board is restored, the DLAG is not automatically switched to the working board unless the protection board becomes faulty.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support distributed link aggregation.
LPT
The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network, when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that the working link is abnormal. As a result, services are switched from the active port to the standby port. Thus, these services are protected.
The LPT function includes P2P and P2MP LPT.
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP
At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP schemes. For details, refer to 8.2.2 MSP Ring and 8.2.3 SNCP.
5.2 RPR Features
This section describes the functions, application and protection of the RPR features of the OptiX OSN 1500.
The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are in reverse directions, as shown in Figure 5-10. The outer ring and the inner ring transmit data packets and control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth utilization. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring. The two rings protect each other.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 92 of 243
Figure 5-10 RPR ring
Node 1
Outer ring control
Node 2
Node 3
Node 42.5 Gbit/s RPR
Outer ring data
Inner ring data
Inner ring control
5.2.1 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.
Basic Functions
The EMR0 and EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 support the RPR features defined by IEEE 802.17. Table 5-6 lists the basic functions of the RPR boards.
Table 5-6 Function list of RPR boards
Function N2EMR0 N2EGR2
Interface 1 GE and 12 FE 2 GE
Service frame format Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG
JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes
Maximum uplink bandwidth
16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Mapping granularity VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-xv (X≤8)
EVPL Supported
EVPLAN Supported
Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN Supported
VLAN Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the adding, deleting, and exchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q/p.
Spanning tree Supports RSTP and STP
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 93 of 243
Function N2EMR0 N2EGR2
Multicast listening (IGMP Snooping)
Supported
RPR protection Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering protection schemes, with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms.
Encapsulation GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041.
LAPS, compliant with ITU-T X.86.
LCAS Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042
CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
Flow control Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X
QoS traffic classification
The N2EM40 and N2EGR2 boards support traffic classification based on port, port+VLAN ID or port+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
Intra-board link aggregation
Supported
Weighted fairness algorithm
Supported
Topology auto-discovery
Supported
Maximum number of nodes
255
Service class Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR and C
Service Class
The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is further divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR (committed information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses.
Table 5-7 lists the differences among these classes.
Table 5-7 RPR service class
Class Subclass Bandwidth Jitter Fairness Algorithm
Application
A0 Pre-allocated, irreclaimable
Low Irrelevant Real-time services A
A1 Pre-allocated, reclaimable
Low Irrelevant Real-time services
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 94 of 243
Class Subclass Bandwidth Jitter Fairness Algorithm
Application
B_CIR Pre-allocated, reclaimable
Medium Irrelevant Near real-time services
B
B_EIR Preemptible, not pre-allocated
High Relevant Near real-time services
C C Preemptible, not pre-allocated
High Relevant Best effort transmission
Topology Auto-Discovery
The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to quickly discover the topologies and their changes, for all the nodes in a ring network. Hence, the topology auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR.
To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS function, which realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without affecting the existing services.
Spatial Reuse
On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial reuse for ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-11, the bandwidth of a single ring is 1.25 Gbit/s. Traffic 1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination Node 4, and thus the bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case, Node 4 is able to send traffic to Node 3 at a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the bandwidth utilization is improved.
Figure 5-11 Spatial reuse
Node 1
Bandwidth of single ring is
1.25Gbit/s
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Traffic 11.25 Gbit/s
Traffic 21.25 Gbit/s
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 95 of 243
Fairness Algorithm
The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness algorithm. The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C services. The weight in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes can have different access rates. Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring and the inner ring separately. In the case of preemptible bandwidth, these two weights decide the bandwidth at which the node transmits lower-class services on the inner ring and the outer ring.
As shown in Figure 5-12, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On the outer ring, assume that the preemptible bandwidth that is available for lower-class services is 1.2 Gbit/s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Figure 5-13 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Figure 5-12 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1
Node 1
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Node 3
1
3
2
2
3
Traffic Bandwidth
400 Mbit/s
400 Mbit/s
400 Mbit/s
1
Node3
Node4
Node Weight
Node2 1
1
1
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 96 of 243
Figure 5-13 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different
Node 1
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Node 31
3
2
2
3
Traffic Bandwidth
400 Mbit/s
600 Mbit/s
200 Mbit/s
1
Node3
Node4
Node Weight
Node2 1
3
2
5.2.2 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.
EVPL Service
The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format.
Figure 5-14 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional EVPL service. Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the packet onto the RPR. Node 3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which then strips the packet.
Figure 5-15 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which the traffic classification is based on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of Node 1.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 97 of 243
Figure 5-14 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping
Node 1
Node 3
FE/GE
Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Action
Tunnel
VC
Destination
Insertion
100
100
Node 4
LSPAction
Tunnel
VC
Stripping
100
100
Action Forwarding
Node 4Node 2FE/GE
Figure 5-15 EVPL service convergence
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
FE
FE
GE
Node 2 Node 4
Traffic Tunnel Destination
Port1+VLAN 2
VC
200 Node 2200
Port1+VLAN 3 300 Node 3300
Port1+VLAN 4 400 Node 4400
FE
VLAN 2
VLAN 3
VLAN 4
VLAN 4
VLAN 3VLAN 2
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service is realized by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the self-learning of source MAC addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes.
Figure 5-16 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets are accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node determines the forwarding port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if the destination MAC address of the packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 98 of 243
Port 1. If the destination address is A2, the packets are forwarded through Port 2. If the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets are forwarded onto the RPR through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100. Node 2 forwards packets in the same way.
Figure 5-16 RPR EVPLAN service
A2
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 2 Node 4
MAC stack VLANPort
A1 none
A2 noneport 2
B1 100rpr1
Port 1
B2 100rpr1
C1 100rpr1
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
Port 1
A1
B1
B2
C1
port 1
MAC forwarding table of node 1
MAC stack VLANPort
A1 100
A2 100rpr1
B1 noneport 1
B2 noneport 2
C1 100rpr1
rpr1
MAC forwarding table of node 2
A2
5.2.3 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 1500 are protected by various protection schemes.
The protection schemes of the RPR services include:
� Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering
� LCAS
� RSTP
� Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP
Wrapping
When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an automatic loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, to connect the inner ring and the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantages of this protection scheme are enhanced protection speed and minimal loss of data, and the disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth.
Figure 5-17 illustrates the wrapping protection. The traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, they perform an automatic loopback to connect the inner ring and the outer ring, so that the protection is realized.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 99 of 243
Figure 5-17 Wrapping protection
Node 1
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Node 3
XFiber cut
Traffic flow
Steering
In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead, the source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is generated by the topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on the ring is less than 16, the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantage of this protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. The disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, the protection switching speed is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated.
Figure 5-18 illustrates the steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the ring, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, the topology auto-discovery protocol discovers a new topology. On the basis of this new topology, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through the inner ring.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 100 of 243
Figure 5-18 Steering protection
Node 1
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Node 3
XFiber cut
Traffic flowafter switching
Traffic flow beforeswitching
Wrapping+Steering
In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the ring first performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and decrease the packet loss. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a new ring topology, the ring performs the steering protection so that the traffic is sent to the destination through the best route. This reduces the waste of bandwidth.
Figure 5-19 illustrates the wrapping+steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the ring, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, a wrapping switching is first performed so that Nodes 2 and 3 are automatically loopbacked. After the topology auto-discovery protocol discovers a new topology, a steering switching is performed. As a result, the traffic passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through the inner ring.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 101 of 243
Figure 5-19 Wrapping+steering protection
XNode 1
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Node 3
Fiber cut
Traffic flowafter switching
Node 1
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Node 3
XFiber cut
Traffic flow
LCAS
The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects the bandwidth.
For details about the LCAS, refer to section 5.1.3 Protection.
RSTP
The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 102 of 243
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP
At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used.
5.3 ATM Features
This section describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 1500.
5.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4, and IDQ1.
An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an N1ADQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3 board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3 ATM services.
Table 5-8 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards.
Table 5-8 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1
Function ADL4 ADQ1
Front panel interface
1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
Optical interface specification
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
Connector type LC
Optical module type
SFP
E3 ATM interface Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3, N1PL3, or N1PL3A board.
IMA Not supported
Maximum uplink bandwidth
8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4
ATM switching capability
1.2 Gbit/s
Mapping mode VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (x≤4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM connections
2048
Traffic type and QoS
IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 103 of 243
Function ADL4 ADQ1
Supported ATM multicast connections
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection (ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring
OAM function (ITU-T I.610)
AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check)
An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1 processing board, the IDL4 or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services.
Table 5-9 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards.
Table 5-9 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1
Function N1IDL4 N1IDQ1
Front panel interface 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1
Optical interface specification
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
Connector type LC
Optical module type SFP
E3 ATM interface Not supported
IMA (compliant with ATM Forum IMA 1.1 standards)
Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the E1 processing board N1PQ1, N1PQM, or N2PQ1.
Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services.
Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the ATM port.
Each IMA group supports 1–32 E1 services. Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any IMA group) to the ATM port.
Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.
Maximum uplink bandwidth
8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4
ATM switching capability
1 Gbit/s
Mapping mode VC-12, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (X≤4)
Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM connections
2048
Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 104 of 243
Function N1IDL4 N1IDQ1
Supported ATM multicast connections
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection (ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring
OAM function (ITU-T I.610)
AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (continuity check)
Board level 1+1 protection
Supported, with switching time less than 1s
5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
Supported Services and Traffic Types
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR services, but does not support ABR services.
� The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit emulation services of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth and latency.
� The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate.
� The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission.
� The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.
In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 1500 meets IETF RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See Table 5-10.
Table 5-10 ATM service types and traffic types
No. Traffic Type Service Type Parameter
1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR None
UBR.1 Clp01Pcr 2 atmNoClpNoScr
CBR Clp01Pcr
3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs
6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs
8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 105 of 243
No. Traffic Type Service Type Parameter
9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt 11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt
CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services
When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service processing board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate NEs, only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In this case, each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATM services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output.
As shown in Figure 5-20, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively occupy a VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively occupies a VC-4 bandwidth. Only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the three services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are output through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 106 of 243
Figure 5-20 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services
2.5 Gbit/s SDHRing
NE 2 NE 4
NE 1
NE 3
34M ATM
Traffic
34M ATMTraffic
155M ATM
Traffic622M ATM
Traffic
Service
Convergence
DSLAM
DSLAM
RouterDSLAM
Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services
The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing for ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv) path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs.
As shown in Figure 5-21, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and sends it to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Then, after the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the cross-connect board. NE2 accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and then performs the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2 for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream are encapsulated into the same VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 107 of 243
Figure 5-21 VP-Ring/VC-Ring
VC4-Xv VP/
VC-Ring
NE 2
NE 4
NE 1
NE 3
34M ATMTraffic
34M ATMTraffic
155M ATM Traffic
622M ATM
Traffic
DSLAM
DSLAM
Route
r
DSLAM
The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to
the NE2, and then sent to VP/VC-Ringafter converged with local service.
Application of IMA Services
The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links are multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow.
The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface of the E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not process service types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer are transparently transmitted.
Figure 5-22 illustrates the IMA service networking.
Figure 5-22 IMA service networking
STM-16 two-fiberbidirectional
MSP ring
T2000
NE1
NE2
NE3
NE4
25km
35km 30km
40km
RNC
NodeB 1
NodeB 3
NodeB 2
NodeB 4
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 108 of 243
5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 1500 are protected at several layers.
The protections that are available are as follows:
� ATM layer protections
� Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP
� 1+1 board level protection for IMA boards
ATM Layer Protections
Compliant with ITU-T I.630, the ATM layer, protections are classified in different ways, as listed in Table 5-11. You can select a combination of the following protection types as required, for example, 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection.
Table 5-11 Classification of ATM protection
Classification Scheme Protection Type
Bridging function 1+1 protection 1:1 protection
Switching direction Unidirectional protection Bidirectional protection
Connection level VPC protection VCC protection
Protection domain Trail protection SNCP, SNCMP, SNCTP
Revertive mode Revertive protection Non-revertive protection
Protected object Single connection protection
Group connection protection
Optical Transmission Layer Protections
The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical transmission layer, where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP. You can set the hold-off time for the ATM protection switching. In this way, when network impairment occurs, the MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical transmission layer performs the switching first, thus achieving the protection of the working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the ATM layer is not performed).
1+1 Board Level Protection for IMA Boards
The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection. For the configuration of 1+1 board level protection, the IDQ1 and IDL4 boards must be inserted in paired slots.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 109 of 243
5.4 SAN Features
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services.
The detailed description of the N1MST4 board is as follows:
� The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. All the port connectors are of the LC (SFP) type.
� Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and FC200) services, with the total bandwidth of not more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The board also supports the full-rate transmission of FC services, which means that one FC200 service or two FC100 services are supported.
� The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH side. FC100 supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km.
� The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client side. FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km.
� Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON or 4 x DVB-ASI services.
� All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format, which is compliant with ITU-T G.7041. All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4, 8, or 16).
Table 5-12 lists the service types and bit rates provided by the N1MST4 board.
Table 5-12 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4
Service Type Bit Rate Remarks
FC100/FICON 1062.5 Mbit/s SAN service
FC200 2125 Mbit/s SAN service
ESCON 200 Mbit/s SAN service
DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s Video service
5.5 DDN Features
This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 1500.
5.5.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services.
� The N1DX1 board processes 8 x 64 kbit/s services and eight framed E1 services and realizes the service convergence. The N1DX1 also cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.
� The N1DXA board cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 110 of 243
� The N1DM12 board accesses framed E1 and N x 64 kbit/s services when it works with the N1DX1 board.
Table 5-13 lists the functions and features of the DDN boards.
Table 5-13 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA
Board Feature N1DX1 (N1DM12) N1DXA
Processing capability
Processes 8 x 64 kbit/s and eight framed E1 services, and cross-connects 48 x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.
Cross-connects 63 x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.
Bandwidth at SDH side
48 x E1. 63 x E1.
Interface specifications
N x 64 bit/s interface: RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24 and X.21.Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4.
None.
Interface impedance
75 ohms or 120 ohms. None.
Connector type The connectors are on the DM12 board. The DB28 connector is used for N x 64 bit/s signals, and the DB44 connector is used for framed E1 signals.
None.
Protection Supports 1:N TPS protection with the switching time being less than 50 ms.
Not supported.
Loopback Supports inloop and outloop for all the ports.
Supports inloop and outloop for all the ports.
PRBS self-test Supported. Not supported.
Alarm and performance
A large number of alarms and performance events are provided to facilitate the equipment management and maintenance.
A large number of alarms and performance events are provided to facilitate the equipment management and maintenance.
5.5.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 1500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used for the following functions, so various services such as RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1 can be accessed to a transmission network.
� Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers
� Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
� Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
� Access and convergence of multipoint routers
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 111 of 243
The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for small-sized and medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and security service halls.
5.5.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
In TPS protection, when any working board is faulty or not in position, the DDN services are switched to the protection board. This ensures the reliable operation of the equipment.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports one group of 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection for the N1DX1 boards.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 113 of 243
6 DCN Features
6.1 Overview
The element management system (EMS) sets up communication with NEs through a data communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these NEs.
In a DCN, the EMS and NEs are regarded as network nodes, which can be connected through Ethernet or physical data communication channels (DCCs).
In practical networking, the EMS and NEs can be located on different floors in a building, in different buildings, or even in different cities. Therefore, the connection between the EMS and NEs usually requires an external DCN that consists of equipment such as LAN switch and routers. On the other hand, the DCN among NEs is referred to as an internal DCN. This section describes the internal DCN that consists of SDH NEs. See Figure 6-1.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 114 of 243
Figure 6-1 DCN network
IP/OSIDCN
External DCN
T2000
HW ECC orIP/OSI over
DCC
Internal DCN
OptiX optical transmission equipment
LAN switch
6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN
With the development of network scale, OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult. A stable and robust DCN management network helps reduce the OAM cost.
In a DCN, the DCC bytes in SDH overheads are used as physical channels for DCN management. The customer does not need to set up private DCN channels so the network construction cost is considerably reduced. For a DCN, the SDH provides the following bandwidth:
� By using the D1–D3 bytes in SDH regenerator section overheads (RSOH), the SDH provides a 192 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
� By using the D4–D12 bytes in SDH multiplex section overheads (MSOH), the SDH provides a 576 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
� By using the D1–D12 bytes in SDH section overheads, the SDH provides a 768 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
Figure 6-2 shows the positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 115 of 243
Figure 6-2 Positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
AU PTR
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 M1 E2
* *
RSOH
MSOH
6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides multiple DCN solutions.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the DCN networking by using the following protocols:
� HWECC
� TCP/IP (IP over DCC)
� OSI (OSI over DCC)
The HWECC protocol is a private protocol developed by Huawei to support the DCN networking of OptiX equipment. The HWECC protocol features easy configuration and application. As it is a private protocol, HWECC protocol does not meet the management requirements for hybrid networking by using the equipment from other vendors.
The TCP/IP and OSI protocols are standard communication protocols that solve the management issue in the case of hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors. These two protocols can also be used in a network that consists of only Huawei equipment.
When OptiX equipment is interconnected with other vendors’ equipment that does not support the TCP/IP and OSI standard communication protocols, Huawei provides the transparent transmission function for DCC bytes, and provides relevant Ethernet service channels to transparently transmit the OAM information.
6.1.3 DCC Resource Allocation Modes
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports different DCC resource allocation modes.
Table 6-1 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 116 of 243
Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 1500
DCC Allocation Q2CXL/R1CXL Q3CXL
Channel type Supports the D1–D3 and D4–D12 channel types.
Mode 1 Supports 40 D1–D3 channels.
Supports 80 D1–D3 channels.
Mode 2 Supports 10 D1–D3 channels.
Supports 10 D4–D12 channels.
Supports 20 D1–D3 channels.
Supports 20 D4–D12 channels.
Mode 3 Supports 22 D1–D3 channels.
Supports 6 D4–D12 channels.
Supports 44 D1–D3 channels.
Supports 12 D4–D12 channels.
Operation mode
Mode 4 Supports 28 D1–D3 channels.
Supports 4 D4–D12 channels.
Supports 32 D1–D3 channels.
Protocol type Supports HWECC, IP and OSI protocols.
Default mode Mode 1
The Q3CXL/R1CXL board can also provide two 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces, which can be used to transparently transmit DCC information. For details, refer to 2.20 DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces.
6.2 HWECC
The equipment supports the HWECC protocol, which is a private protocol defined by Huawei.
6.2.1 Features
The HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment.
In hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors, the HWECC protocol is not able to identify the OAM information from other vendors’ equipment, but can transparently transmit such OAM information. By using the existing DCC resources, the user is able to meet the requirements of a centralized management of equipment.
The HWECC protocol has the following features:
� The protocol provides a flexible networking environment.
� NEs can be connected through optical interfaces or Ethernet interfaces for embedded control channel (ECC) communication.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 117 of 243
� The protocol provides transparent transmission for the OAM information from other vendors' equipment.
In the OptiX OSN 1500, each slot supports a maximum of eight ECC channels.
6.2.2 Application
The HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.
OAM Information Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment Only
When OAM information is transmitted only among the OptiX OSN equipment, a gateway NE is required for the communication with the T2000. The T2000 is connected to the gateway NE through the Qx interface and tests, manages and maintains the entire network.
The T2000 system helps improve the network service quality, lower the maintenance cost, and ensure a reasonable use of network resources. A non-gateway NE is connected to the gateway NE through ECC, to realize the transmission of the OAM information.
In some cases, extended ECC communication through Ethernet interfaces is also available among NEs. See Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC
Network cable
Fiber
HUB1PC
HUB2NE6GNE1
NE2
NE3 NE4
NE5
NE6 NE7
NE8
NE9 NE10
NE12
NE11
Subnet1 Subnet2
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment
When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4–D12 bytes of the OptiX OSN equipment. See Figure 6-4.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 118 of 243
Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC)
Third party
equipment
Third party
equipment
D1-D3 D1-D3Transparenttransmission
D4-D12
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment
When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4-D12 bytes of the equipment. See Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC)
Third partyequipment
Third partyequipment
D1-D3 D1-D3
Transparent
transmission
D4-D12
6.3 IP Over DCC
The equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol.
6.3.1 Features
The OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network management information by using the IP over DCC protocol.
The IP over DCC protocol has the following features:
� The TCP/IP protocol realizes the compatibility with the equipment from other vendors. In this case, the network management is simplified.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 119 of 243
� The Layer 3 functions of protocol stacks are adopted. In this case, additional overheads or server trails are not required for the transmission of the OAM information of other vendors’ equipment.
� The protocol provides flexible networking modes.
� Several application layer protocols are supported.
6.3.2 Application
The IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment
When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment, by using the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (IP)
Third party
equipment
Third partyequipment
IP over DCC
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment
When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment, by using the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-7.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 120 of 243
Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment (IP)
Third party
equipment
Third partyequipment
IP over DCC
Third partyequipment
Third party
equipment
6.4 OSI Over DCC
The equipment supports the OSI over DCC protocol.
6.4.1 Features
The OSI over DCC protocol is used for hybrid networking between the OptiX OSN equipment and other optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC.
The OSI over DCC protocol has the following features:
� In a transmission network that consists of equipment from different vendors, the OSI over DCC protocol enables the transparent transmission of OAM information at the network layer, and thus provides a more flexible networking.
� The user does not need to set up additional DCN channels. The existing DCC resources realize the centralized management of equipment from different vendors.
6.4.2 Application
The OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment
When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by third-party equipment, by using the OSI over DCC protocol.
As shown in Figure 6-8, Huawei equipment is located at the network edges, and the equipment from other vendors is located in the backbone network. The OAM information between the T2000 and the OptiX OSN equipment needs to be forwarded
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 121 of 243
by the equipment from other vendors. In this case, each subnet that consists of the Huawei equipment must have a minimum of one gateway NE.
Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (OSI)
Third partyequipment
Third partyequipment
OSI over DCC
OSIprotocolstack
OSIprotocol
stack
OSIprotocol
stack
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment
When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment, by using the OSI over DCC protocol.
As shown in Figure 6-9, the Huawei equipment is located in the backbone network, and the equipment from other vendors is located at the network edges. The OAM information between the network management system and the equipment of other vendors needs to be forwarded by the Huawei equipment.
In actual application, a network cannot always be divided in this manner. A more common hybrid networking is that the equipment from different vendors coexists at the core layer and the peripheral layer.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 122 of 243
Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment (OSI)
Third partyequipment
Third partyequipment
OSI over DCC
Third partyequipment
Third partyequipment
OSI protocol stack
OSI protocol
stack
OSI
protocolstack
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 123 of 243
7 ASON Features
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies
The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control links and TE links.
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links
The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.
When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own control links to the entire network. See Figure 7-1. As a result, each NE obtains the information of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-wide control topology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which is used for the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 124 of 243
Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links
ASON domain
When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically discover the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the management system for real-time display. See Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Management of control topology
R1
R2
R3
R4
: ASON NE
: User equipment
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 125 of 243
7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links
The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TE link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire network through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wide resource topology.
ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion and addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to T2000, which performs a real-time refresh.
As shown in Figure 7-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayed on the NM in real time.
Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration
The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.
The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services. To configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidth requirement, and protection level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all automatically completed by the network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit link and excluded link to constrain the service routing.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 126 of 243
Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing and signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure services.
For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and I in Figure 7-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-connection at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I, the network calculates the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route.
The service is created as follows:
� Choose the bandwidth granularity.
� Choose the server level.
� Choose the source node.
� Choose the sink node.
� Create the service.
Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
GH
I
7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration
The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network security.
As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability. Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not need to reserve 50% bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy increasingly large bandwidth demand. In addition, this networking mode also provides more than one recovery route for each services so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network security.
As shown in Figure 7-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network calculates another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 127 of 243
Figure 7-5 Trail restoration
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
GH
I
7.4 ASON Clock Tracing
ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock tracing mode. In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON clock tracing mode. In this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet.
In an ASON clock subnet, each ASON NE automatically traces the best clock source. The clock is then automatically traced and switched. In this way, clock interlock is avoided. In addition, the clock configuration is simplified. For an ASON domain with many ASON NEs, several ASON clock subnets should be created if more than 20 ASON NEs are on the clock tracing link in a clock subnet. Each ASON clock subnet generates its own clock tracing relation to trace the primary source in the local subnet. In each ASON clock subnet, the change of primary source and link does not affect the clock tracing relation in other ASON clock subnets. Generally, one ASON clock subnet is created in one ASON domain.
Advantages of the ASON Clock Tracing
The ASON clock tracing has the following advantages.
� Simple configuration: For one ASON clock subnet, only the primary clock need be created to realize auto-tracing and auto-switching of the clock.
� Auto-tracing and auto-switching: In an ASON clock subnet, the clock has the auto-tracing and auto-switching features.
� The ASON tracing avoids the clock interlock.
Clock Protection Protocol
To realize the ASON clock tracing, all ASON NEs within the ASON clock subnet must start the standard SSM protocol.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 128 of 243
Primary Reference Clock Source
Within the ASON clock subnet, the ASON software automatically sets the clock tracing relation. At the edge of an ASON clock subnet, the external clock source, or internal clock source of edge NEs should be manually set as the primary reference clock source for the ASON clock subnet. The following clock sources can be set as the primary clock reference source.
� Line clock source
� External clock source
� Internal clock source of edge NEs
For one ASON clock subnet, several primary reference clock sources can be set. The ASON clock subnet, however, traces only one of these primary reference clock sources. The other clock sources back up the traced clock source. When the selected primary reference clock source fails, the entire subnet automatically traces another backup primary reference clock source. In this way, a new clock tracing tree is established. A priority should be set for the primary reference clock source.
As shown in Figure 7-6, in an ASON clock subnet, primary and secondary clock sources are configured at NE A and NE B respectively. Other ASON NEs in the ASON clock subnet automatically create clock tracing trees by computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the primary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous. When the primary BITS fails, each ASON NE creates the clock tracing tree by re-computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the secondary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.
Figure 7-6 ASON clock subnet
Primary baseclock source
Standby baseclock source
A
BITS BITS
B
:ASON NE
: BITS
Interfacing Mode
By default, the ASON software automatically creates the clock tracing tree according to the network topology. In this way, each ASON NE then can automatically trace an available clock source. If necessary, set the interfacing mode of some optical
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 129 of 243
interfaces to the clock quality not detected mode to adjust the clock tracing tree. In this way, these optical interfaces are excluded from the options of the clock tracing sources for ASON NEs.
Regeneration Source
A regeneration source is a device used to regenerate clock signals. If an NE is configured with such a device, the system tracing clock of the NE is strengthened and the quality of the out-link clock is increased. During the computation for creating the clock tracing tree, the clock signals strengthened by the regeneration source are selected with priority.
For configuration of the regeneration source, 2M input and output interfaces are used. An NE receives the upstream clock signals and outputs them to the regeneration device. The regenerated clock signals then return to the NE through the 2M input interface. The clock then works as the system tracing clock for the NE. In this way, clock signals are strengthened and the line clock signals output from the NE are also strengthened.
Clock Tracing Relation in the ASON Clock Subnet
The clock tracing relation in the ASON clock subnet is as follows:
� The ASON clock subnet take priority to trace the primary source of the highest clock quality.
� If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality, the ASON clock subnet traces the primary reference clock source of the highest priority.
� If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality and priority, the ASON clock subnet traces the clock source in the trail with the least hops to generate multiple clock tracing trees. In this way, too long clock tracing trail is avoided.
� If all the primary reference clock sources are invalid, the ASON clock subnet traces the internal clock source with the smallest node ID. Thus, clocks in the entire network are synchronized.
Hybrid Network of the ASON Clock Subnet and Traditional Clock Subnet
If the traditional clock subnet works in the SSM disabled mode, you should configure the quality and priority of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock network works in the standard SSM mode, you should configure only the quality of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock subnet works in the extended SSM mode, you should only modify the subnet to the standard SSM mode, and then form a hybrid network with the ASON clock subnet.
Modifying the Traditional ASON Subnet to the ASON Clock Subnet
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the SSM disabled mode, you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the quality and priority of the primary reference clock source.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 130 of 243
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the standard SSM mode, you should directly create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primary reference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the extended SSM mode, you should modify the extended SSM mode to the standard SSM mode. Then you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the primary reference clock source.
7.5 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection, as listed in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Service level
Service Protection and Restoration Scheme
Implementation Means
Switching and Rerouting Time
Diamond service
Protection and restoration
SNCP and rerouting
Switching time < 50ms
Rerouting time < 2 s
Gold service Protection and restoration
MSP and rerouting Switching time < 50ms
Rerouting time < 2 s
Silver service
Restoration Rerouting Rerouting time < 2 s
Copper service
No protection
No restoration
- -
Iron service Preemptable MSP -
Table 7-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.
Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services
Service Level Working Resource of TE Link
Protection Resource of TE Link
Non-Protection Resource of TE Link
Service creation Not used Not used Used
Service rerouting
Not used Used when the resource is not enough
Used with the priority
Diamond service
Service optimization
Not used Not used Used
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 131 of 243
Service Level Working Resource of TE Link
Protection Resource of TE Link
Non-Protection Resource of TE Link
Service creation Used with the priority
Not used Used when the resource is not enough
Service rerouting
Used with the priority
Used when the resource is not enough
Used when the resource is not enough
Gold service
Service optimization
Used with the priority
Not used Used when the resource is not enough
Service creation Not used Not used Used
Service rerouting
Not used Used when the resource is not enough
Used with the priority
Silver service
Service optimization
Not used Not used Used
Service creation Not used Not used Used Copper service
Service optimization
Not used Not used Used
Iron service
Service creation Not used Used with the priority Used when the resource is not enough
7.6 Diamond Services
Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation.
A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It is also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available between the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. One is the working LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the working LSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receives the service from the working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP.
Figure 7-7 shows a diamond service.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 132 of 243
Figure 7-7 Diamond Services
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
GH
I
Protection LSP
Working LSP
There are three types of diamond services.
� Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails.
� Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail.
� Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 7-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services
Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
Protection and restoration
� If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the active LSP and the other is the standby LSP.
� If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be reserved for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the service survivability.
Rerouting � Supports rerouting lockout.
� Supports rerouting priority.
� Supports three rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever possible
Do not use existing trails whenever possible
Best route
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 133 of 243
Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Revertive � Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically.
� Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually.
Service migration � Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and diamond services.
� Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
� Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
Service association Does not support service association.
ASON server trail Does not support diamond ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS
Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node
Protection and restoration
� When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is not triggered.
� When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
� When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting � Supports rerouting lockout.
� Supports rerouting priority.
� Supports three rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever possible
Do not use existing trails whenever possible
Best route
Revertive � Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically.
� Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 134 of 243
Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Service migration � Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and diamond services.
� Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
� Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
Service association Does not support service association.
ASON server trail Does not support diamond ASON server trails
Alarms to trigger rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS
Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Requirements for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node
Protection and restoration
� When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
� When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is not triggered.
� When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is not triggered.
Service migration � Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and diamond services.
� Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
� Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
Service association Does not support service association.
ASON server trail Does not support diamond ASON server trails.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 135 of 243
7.7 Gold Services
Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links or non-protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is cut, the ASON triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex section protection fails, the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service.
As shown in Figure 7-8, a gold service can be configured from A to I.
Figure 7-8 Gold services
R1
R2
R3
R4
: ASON NE
: User equipment
A
B
C
D
E
F
GH
I
MSP
MSP
MSP
Table 7-6 lists the attributes of gold services.
Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services
Attribute Gold Service
Requirements for creation
Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex section protection
� Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear multiplex section protection chain to create gold services.
� Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold services.
� Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold services.
Protection and restoration
When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is performed to protect services. When MS switching fails, rerouting is then triggered to restore services.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 136 of 243
Attribute Gold Service
Rerouting � Supports rerouting lockout.
� Supports rerouting priority.
� Supports three rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever possible
Do not use existing trails whenever possible
Best route
Revertive � Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically.
� Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Service migration � Supports migration between permanent connections and gold services.
� Supports migration between gold services and silver services.
� Supports migration between gold services and copper services.
Service switching Supports manual switching.
Service optimization Supports service optimization.
ASON server trail Supports gold ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS
7.8 Silver Services
The service restoring time ranges from hundred milliseconds to a few seconds. The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.
Silver services are also called rerouting services. Upon an LSP failure, periodical rerouting is performed until the rerouting succeeds. If there are not enough resources, service may be interrupted.
As shown in Figure 7-9, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is cut, the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber. Hence, services are protected.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 137 of 243
Figure 7-9 A silver service
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
GH
I
Table 7-7 lists the attributes of silver services.
Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services
Attribute Silver Services
Requirements for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting � Supports rerouting lockout.
� Supports rerouting priority.
� Supports three rerouting policies:
Use existing trails whenever possible
Do not use existing trails whenever possible
Best route
Revertive � Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically.
� Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Shared mesh restoration trail
Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for revertive silver trials.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 138 of 243
Attribute Silver Services
Service migration � Supports migration between permanent connections and silver services.
� Supports migration between diamond services and silver services.
� Supports migration between gold services and silver services.
� Supports migration between silver services and copper services.
Service optimization � Supports service optimization.
� If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be optimized before reverting to its original route.
Service association Supports service association.
ASON server trail Supports silver ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS
7.9 Copper Services
The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services in holidays, are configured as copper services.
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not reroute and are interrupted. Table 7-8 lists the attributes of copper services.
Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services
Attribute Silver Service
Requirements for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
Service restoration
Does not support rerouting.
Service migration � Supports migration between permanent connections and copper services.
� Supports migration between diamond services and copper services.
� Supports migration between gold services and copper services.
� Supports migration between silver services and copper services.
Service optimization
Supports service optimization.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 139 of 243
Attribute Silver Service
Service association
Supports service association.
ASON server trail
Supports ASON server trails.
7.10 Iron Services
The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply non-protection resources or protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs. When an LSP fails, services are interrupted and rerouting is not triggered.
� When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS switching occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted. After the MS is recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption, preemption and restoration of the iron service are all reported to the T2000.
� When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network resources are insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted silver service or diamond service. Thus, the service is interrupted.
Table 7-9 lists the attributes of iron service.
Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services
Attribute Iron Service
Requirements for creation
Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex section protection
To create iron services, the following resources can be used:
� Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP
� Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP
� Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Service restoration
Does not support rerouting.
Service migration Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent connections.
Service optimization
Supports service optimization.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 140 of 243
7.11 Tunnels
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASON server trails.
When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The protection level for the tunnel can be gold, silver or copper. Then, use the management system to complete the configuration of the lower order service. See Figure 7-10.
Figure 7-10 Tunnel
R1
R2
R3
R4
VC4 tunnel VC12 service
: ASON NE
: User equipmentASON domain
The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service types. Its cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be configured manually. As shown in Figure 7-11, there is a tunnel between NE1 and NE2 which can be a gold ASON server trail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON server trail. During service creation, the ASON automatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and NE2 and the timeslots of the line boards.
After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or optimization of the tunnels, however, the cross-connections at the source and sink nodes automatically switch to the new ports.
In addition, the end-to-end tunnel and lower order service can be created.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 141 of 243
Figure 7-11 Lower cross-connection
VC12
NE1 NE2
VC12ASON server trail
VC4
VC12
Cross-connection
Line unitTributary unit
Table 7-10 lists the attributes of tunnels.
Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels
Attribute Gold Tunnel Silver Tunnel Copper Tunnel
Requirements for creation
Same as gold services Same as silver services
Same as copper services
Service restoration
Same as gold services Same as silver services
Does not support rerouting
Rerouting � Supports rerouting lockout.
� Supports rerouting priority.
� Supports rerouting lockout.
� Supports rerouting priority.
Does not support rerouting
Revertive Not supported Not supported Not supported
Pre-configuration of restoring route
Not supported Supported Not supported
Service association
Not supported Supported Supported
Service migration
� Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent connections.
� Supports migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels.
� Supports migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels.
� Supports migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels.
Service optimization
Supports service optimization..
Tunnel level VC-4
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 142 of 243
7.12 Service Association
The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points into the ASON network.
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. During the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of the associated service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed from two points.
As shown in Figure 7-12, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber between B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP.
Figure 7-12 Service association
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
GH
I
1+1protection
1+1protection
Table 7-11 lists the attributes of service association.
Table 7-11 Attributes of service association
Attribute Service Association
Service optimization
Supports optimization of associated services.
Rerouting When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated service.
Service type � Supports the association of two silver services.
� Supports association of two copper services.
� Supports the association of a silver service and a copper service.
� Supports the association of two silver tunnels.
� Supports the association of two copper tunnels.
� Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 143 of 243
7.13 Service Optimization
After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the service optimization.
LSP optimization has the following features.
� Only manual optimization is supported.
� The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.
� During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not allowed.
� During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations, optimization is not allowed.
� The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper and tunnel services.
7.14 Service Migration
OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interrupt the services.
Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections
Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
� Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections
� Migration between gold services and permanent connections
� Migration between silver services and permanent connections
� Migration between copper services and permanent connections
� Migration between iron services and permanent connections
� Migration between tunnel services and server trail.
Service Migration between ASON Trails
Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
� Migration between diamond services and silver services
� Migration between diamond services and copper services
� Migration between silver services and copper services
� Migration between gold services and silver services
� Migration between gold services and copper services
� Migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels
� Migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels
� Migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 144 of 243
7.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes
After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes. You can revert all service to the original routes.
The operation reverting network-wide services to original routes interrupts the services. Be cautious to perform the operation.
Original Route
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON service. If the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the services can be adjusted to the original route manually or automatically. In addition, the current route can be set to the original route after rerouting of the ASON services.
ASON services are classified into revertive services and non-revertive services. If the original route recovers after rerouting, the revertive services can be manually or automatically reverted to the original route. If the original route recovers after rerouting, the non-revertive services can be only manually reverted to the original route. Before the non-revertive services revert to the original route, the resources of the original route may be used by other services.
Revertive Services
The ASON services supporting the service reverting are as follows:
� Diamond services
� Gold services
� Silver services
� Tunnels
Description on Service Reverting
For the detailed description of reverting, refer to the Table 7-12.
Table 7-12 Reverting service to original routes
Attribution Non-Revertive Service Revertive Service
Prerequisites The original route has no failures and has free timeslots.
The original route has no failures.
Reverting mode
Manually reverting. Manually reverting or automatically reverting.
Batch reverting
Supported. Not supported.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 145 of 243
Attribution Non-Revertive Service Revertive Service
Timeslots Only if the original timeslots in the original route are spare and is "Reverting to original timeslots" set, the service can revert to the original timeslots.
Services reverting to original routes. Services reverting to original timeslots.
Modifying original route
Supported. Supported.
Reversion lock
- Supported.
7.16 Preset Restoring Trail
Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing.
The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for a diamond/silver/gold ASON trail. When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset restoring trail.
7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail
For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of rerouting, the silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a restoration trail is called a shared mesh restoration trail.
When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service uses the resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are used for service restoration. If only partial resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are used with priority for computation of a restoration trail. The other resources may be faulty or used by other services that share the trail.
As shown in Figure 7-13, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver services share the TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver service 1 (A-B-C) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When the revertive silver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver services reroute, only one of them can reroute to the shared mesh restoration trail, for the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots between G and H.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 146 of 243
Figure 7-13 Shared mesh restoration trail
Revertive silver service 1
Share MESH
restoration trail 1
A B C
G
D EF
H
Revertive silver service 2
Share MESH
restoration trail 2
Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.
� Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh restoration trail.
� A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at different levels.
� For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the revertive attribute cannot be changed.
� The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected resources of TE links.
� For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set the preset restoration trail.
Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following differences.
� For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no resources are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration trail may be used by other services. When the service reroutes, the preset restoration trail cannot be used.
� For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The reserved resources cannot be used by other services. In this way, services can be restored with the best effort. In addition, to increase the resource utilization, the shared mesh restoration trails for different services can share some resources.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 147 of 243
7.18 Equilibrium of Network Traffic
The ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible.
The ASON calculates a best route according to the CSPF algorithm. If there are many services between two nodes, there may be several services sharing a same route. The traffic equilibrium function is used to avoid this situation. As shown in Figure 7-14, there are many silver services between R2 and R4. To make the network more safe and reliable, the ASON allocates them to different routes averagely as possible such as A-D-E-I, A-B-C-F-I and A-B-G-H-I.
Figure 7-14 Traffic equilibrium
: ASON NE
: User equipment
R1
R2
R3
R4
A
B
C
D
E
F
GH
I
7.19 Shared Risk Link Group
In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable.
The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risks, that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be rerouted to another link that has the same risk.
Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the network so as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the faulty link share the same risk and to shorten the service restoration time during ASON service rerouting. You can change the SRLG attribute.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 148 of 243
7.20 ASON Trail Group
The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
LCAS
LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of VCTRUNK can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in Figure 7-15, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1 and two over path 2. If the VC4 in path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all Ethernet service without affecting the service of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on either path if necessary.
Figure 7-15 LCAS (different path)
Router BRouter ANE1 NE2
VCTRUNK1
Path 1
Path 2
If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the service. As shown in Figure 7-16, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4 fails, the Ethernet service remains unaffected.
Figure 7-16 LCAS (same path)
Router BRouter A
NE1 NE2
VCTRUNK1
ASON Trail Group
An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within one LSP group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To provide virtual services with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as separate as possible.
Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each ASON trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and sink. The trails must also be as separated as possible.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 149 of 243
7.21 Protocol Encryption
You can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of the network.
An external entity may modify the OSPF-TE protocol packets of the network, counterfeit a node of this network and transmit packets, or receive the packets transmitted by nodes in the network and repeat the attack. To prevent these network insecurities, the ASON provides the function to encrypt protocols. In an ASON domain, the RSVP and OSPF-TE protocols are encrypted for authentication.
The RSVP authentication is configured for nodes and the OSPF-TE authentication for interconnected interfaces (slots and optical interfaces).
The authentication can be non-authentication, plain text authentication or MD5 authentication.
The check succeeds only when the authentication modes and passwords of adjacent nodes are the same.
7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane
To increase the network maintainability, the ASON network supports the reporting alarms of the control plane.
Alarms on the control plane include node alarms, link alarms and service alarms. Node alarms indicate whether the node ID and authentication code are correct, and whether the node ID and authentication code are associated with neighbors. Link alarms indicate the link availability, and whether the configuration of link timeslot and MS is correct. Service alarms indicate whether the services are interrupted, whether the service level is downgraded, and whether the service trail is changed.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 151 of 243
8 Protection
8.1 Equipment Level Protection
The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1 protection for power supplies.
8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards
The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
Table 8-1 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 8-2 lists the TPS protection parameters.
Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards
Service Type Protection Scheme Supported Boards
E1/T1 One 1:N protection (N ≤ 2) N1PQM, N1PQ1, N2PQ1a
E1 Two 1:N protections (N ≤ 2) R1PD1, R2PD1
E3/T3/E4/STM-1 One 1:1 protection N1PD3, N1PL3, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PQ3, N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4, N1SEP
DDN One 1:N protection (N ≤ 2) N1DX1
Ethernet One 1:1 protection N2EFS0, N4EFS0
a: The N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.
Table 8-2 TPS protection parameters
Parameter Description
Priority 1–X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is the highest priority.
Switching type Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 152 of 243
Parameter Description
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
� The clock of the working board is lost.
� The working board is offline.
� The working board is cold reset.
� The hardware of the working board fails.
� A switching command is issued.
Switching time ≤ 50 ms
Revertive mode Revertive
WTR time 300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.
8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect, Timing and SCC Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect, timing and SCC units, the equipment can run in a safe manner.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the cross-connect, timing and SCC units are integrated in the CXL series boards. The CXL series boards adopt a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table 8-3 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect, timing and SCC units.
Table 8-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect, timing and SCC units
Parameter Description
Slots for working and protection boards
Slot 4 is for the working board and slot 5 is for the protection board.
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
� The working board is offline.
� The working board is cold reset.
� The board is warm reset and the switching protocol is triggered.
� The hardware of the working board fails.
� A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board, and the original working board becomes the protection board.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 153 of 243
8.1.3 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards
The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection.
Table 8-4 lists the 1+1 protection parameters for Ethernet boards.
Table 8-4 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards
Parameter BPS, PPS DLAG
Slots for working and protection boards
Configurable according to the requirement.
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
� The port status of the working board is Link Down.
� The clock of the working board is lost.
� The hardware of the working board fails.
� The working board is off line.
� A switching command is issued.
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
� The port status of the working board is Link Down.
� The clock of the working board is lost.
� The hardware of the working board fails.
� The working board is off line.
Switching time ≤ 350 ms In full duplex mode: ≤ 3 s
In auto-negotiation mode: ≤ 500 ms
When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS protection switching, the following conditions must be met.
� The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same working mode as the protection group.
� The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through optical fibers or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present between the two ends.
� The working mode should not be modified before the protection group is deleted. Otherwise, the protection group becomes abnormal.
The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end of the protection group.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 154 of 243
8.1.4 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards
The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 support board level 1+1 protection.
Table 8-5 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.
Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards
Parameter Description
Slots for working and protection boards
Configurable as required.
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
� A manual switching command is issued.
� The working board is offline.
� The working board is under a cold reset.
� The power supply of the working board fails.
� The clock of the working board fails.
� The hardware of the working board fails.
Revertive mode Non-revertive
Switching time ≤ 50 ms
8.1.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit
The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can access two –48 V DC power supplies by using two R1PIU or R1PIUA boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other. When either of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal operation of the equipment.
8.1.6 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit
The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
In the OptiX OSN 1500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has two types: One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and selective receiving.
A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and one board of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection.
Table 8-6 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 155 of 243
Table 8-6 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX
Parameter Description
Slots for working and protection boards
Configurable as required.
Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
� The hardware of the working board fails.
� A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Non-revertive
Switching time ≤ 50 ms
8.1.7 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply
The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit on the R1AUX or R2AUX board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power supply immediately provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the board.
8.1.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions
The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection.
Power-Down Protection During Software Loading
The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.
Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply
The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damage that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.
When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the software can re-initialize the chip.
The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can affect services. In this case, when the value of such a register is changed due to unstable voltages, the value can be restored to normal.
When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the power supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 156 of 243
Board Temperature Detection
Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and timing board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high temperature, an alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about cleaning the fans.
8.2 Network Level Protection
The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection.
8.2.1 Linear MSP
The linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings.
The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 1500 provides 1+1 and 1:N (N≤14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 12 linear MSPs. In the 1:N protection scheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the protection system. The switching time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Planning Guidelines.
Table 8-7 lists the linear MSP parameters.
Table 8-7 Linear MSP parameters
Protection Type
Revertive Mode
Switching Protocol
Switching Time
Default WTR Time
Switching Condition
1+1 single-ended switching
Non-revertive
Not required
≤ 50 ms -
1+1 single-ended switching
Revertive Not required
≤ 50 ms 600s
1+1 dual-ended switching
Non-revertive
APS protocol
≤ 50 ms -
1+1 dual-ended switching
Revertive APS protocol
≤ 50 ms 600s
1:N dual-ended switching
Revertive APS protocol
≤ 50 ms 600s
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
� R_LOS
� R_LOF
� MS_AIS
� B2_EXC
� B2_SD (optional)
� Forced switching
� Manual switching
� Exercise switching
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 157 of 243
8.2.2 MSP Ring
The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP rings, with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
Table 8-8 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Planning Guidelines.
Table 8-8 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 1500
Protection Scheme Maximum Number of MSP Rings Supported
STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring 1
STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring 2
Table 8-9 lists the MSP ring parameters.
Table 8-9 MSP ring parameters
Protection Type
Revertive Mode
Switching Mode Switching Time
Default WTR Time
Switching Condition
Two-fiber bidirectional MSP
Revertive � Forced switching
� Manual switching
� Exercise switching
≤ 50 ms 600s
Two-fiber unidirectional MSP
Revertive � Forced switching
� Manual switching
� Exercise switching
≤ 50 ms 600s
Four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Revertive � Forced switching - ring
� Manual switching - ring
� Exercise switching - ring
� Forced switching - span
� Manual switching - span
� Exercise switching - span
≤ 50 ms 600s
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
� R_LOS
� R_LOF
� MS_AIS
� B2_EXC
� B2_SD (Optional)
� Forced switching
� Manual switching
� Exercise switching
The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 1500 has the following features.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 158 of 243
Adjustable MS Bandwidth
The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain.
In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 1500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by VC-4 without interrupting services. For an STM-16 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to eight VC-4s. For an STM-16 four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to 16 VC-4s.
Upgradeable MS Bandwidth
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without interrupting services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an STM-16 MSP ring without interrupting services.
Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section
For STM-16 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 1500 is able to process two sets of K bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up in one optical interface.
MS Squelching
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4 level.
In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by extra traffic. When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a node to be isolated from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to preempt this timeslot. As a result, the misconnection of services occurs. When extra traffic is transmitted in the protection path, the traffic on the working path may preempt the protection timeslot that is being used by extra traffic, even if only one point fails in the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs.
To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 1500 node sets up a detailed list of connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the automatic protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance the possibility of misconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then discards these services that may be misconnected.
8.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), the subnetwork connection multipath protection (SNCMP), and the subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP), for subnetworks that meet the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
SNCP
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 8-1.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 159 of 243
Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail
NE1
NE4
NE3
NE2
NE5
NE8
NE7
NE6
The unprotected trail
NE1
NE4
NE3
NE2
NE5
NE8
NE7
NE6
The working trail
Convert to an SNCP-protected trailConvert to an unprotected trail
The protection trail
In the trail management window of the T2000, you can convert an exiting unprotected trail to an SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an SNCP-protected trail to an unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level operations are supported:
� Manual switching to protection path
� Manual switching to working path
� Forced switching to protection path
� Forced switching to working path
� Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting
� Revertive mode setting
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 160 of 243
Table 8-10 lists the SNCP parameters.
Table 8-10 SNCP parameters
Protection Type Revertive Mode
Switching Time
Default WTR Time
Switching Conditions
Revertive ≤ 50 ms 600s SNCP
Non-revertive
≤ 50 ms -
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
� R_LOS
� R_LOF
� AU_LOP
� TU_LOP
� MS_AIS
� AU_AIS
� TU_AIS
� HP_UNEQ (Optional)
� HP_TIM (Optional)
� B2_EXC
� B3_EXC (Optional)
� B3_SD (Optional)
� BIP_EXC
� BIP_SD
SNCMP
The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path) protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1 protection scheme.
The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service protection is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective receiving at the sink. The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP.
Figure 8-2 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts services to multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according to the service priority and then the service quality. When services are correctly received on both the working and protection paths, the sink selects the service from the working path.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 161 of 243
Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection
Source Sink
Working
Protection 1
Protection 2
Protection 3
Intermediatesubnetworks
A B
In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 8-3, two protection paths protect a working path, and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission media. Under normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path.
Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
WorkingProtection 1
Protection 2
MicrowareRadio
MicrowareRadio
When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure 8-4, NE3 receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 162 of 243
Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
WorkingProtection 1
Protection 2
MicrowareRadio
MicrowareRadio
When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both become faulty, as shown in Figure 8-5, NE3 receives the service from the second protection path Protection 2.
Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure
NE 1
NE 2
NE 3
NE 4
WorkingProtection 1
Protection 2
MicrowareRadio
MicrowareRadio
SNCTP
The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all its services can be switched to the protection path.
The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only the entire VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 163 of 243
When the working path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all services in the working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant only to lower order services, lower order alarms are raised, and the switching does not occur.
8.2.4 DNI
The DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T G.842.
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure.
The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:
� Two SNCP rings
� An SNCP ring and an MSP ring
� Two MSP rings
Figure 8-6 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings.
Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings
SNCPRing 1
SNCPRing 2
NE E
NE DNE C
NE F
NE G
NE A
Selecting Point
Forward Working RoutingReverse Working Routing
When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 164 of 243
� A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1.
� A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2.
� A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings.
� NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty.
� NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty.
� NE C and NE E are faulty.
� NE D and NE F are faulty.
The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is faulty, inter-ring services are not affected.
8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection
When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly.
Figure 8-7 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
STM-4
SNCPSTM-4
MSP
STM-16
ST
M-1
6
8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP
In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface.
A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board must be able to process multiple sets of independent K bytes. N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16 and N1SF16 of the OptiX OSN 1500 support the configuration of shared optical paths. An STM-16 optical interface supports a maximum of two sets of K bytes.
Figure 8-8 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 165 of 243
Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP
STM-4Optical-path-
shared MSP ring
STM-16
STM-4STM-4
STM-4STM-4
STM-4Optical-path-
shared MSP ring
For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as shown in Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines
STM-16
MSP ring 1
MSP ring 2X
STM-4
STM-4
STM-16
The OptiX OSN 1500 also supports the line units of the same rate to form a shared protection in two directions, as shown in Figure 8-10. In this case, the west STM-16 line units can only add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group.
Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate
STM-16
MSP ring 1
MSP ring 2X
STM-16
STM-16
STM-16
8.2.7 RPR Protection
The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
Figure 8-11 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The outer ring and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 166 of 243
The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the packets added to the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path is used. A node can only perform three types of operations on the packets, that is, insertion (adding a new packet onto the ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and stripping (dropping the packet locally). Compared with a mesh network, an Ethernet ring considerably decreases the communication traffic among nodes. This is because a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every single packet.
Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR
Node 1
Outer ring
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Inner ring
RPR
In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for packets.
The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that are adjacent to the fiber cut point. See Figure 8-12.
Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection
Node 1
Outer ring
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Inner ring
RPR
Wapping
The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case of a fiber cut. See Figure 8-13.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 167 of 243
Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 1Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
RPR
Steering
In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination in a reverse direction, and the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection switching, the wrapping function is usually performed first. After the new topology and the new service trail are created, the steering function is then performed. Such a mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during the protection switching, and that the protection switching time is decreased.
8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection
The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
Figure 8-14 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves the protection resources, and can be applied on any physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes and bandwidths.
Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
NE1
NE2
NE4
NE3
Working path
Protection path
ATM service ATM service
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels (VCs), and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. Two connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the protection path, are set up at the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. In normal conditions, the receive end selects the service from the working path. When the primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects the failure and triggers the protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the protection path, and thus the ATM service is protected.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 169 of 243
9 Clock
9.1 Clock Source
The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace different types of clock sources, which are as follows:
� External clock source
� Line clock source
� Tributary clock source
� Internal clock source
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports priority setting for clock sources. By default, the internal clock source is of the lowest priority.
9.1.1 External Clock Source
The OptiX OSN 1500 support two external clock source inputs.
� Two 75-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
� Two 120-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
9.1.2 Line Clock Source
The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace the line clock source.
9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source
The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace tributary clock sources.
The specific tracing relation is as follows.
� When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the ninth physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PQ1, PQM and PD1.
� When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the fourth physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PD3, PQ3.
� When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to the first physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PL3, DX1.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 170 of 243
� When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to any physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the SPQ4.
9.1.4 Internal Clock Source
When all the line, tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable, or when only the internal clock source is available in the priority list, the OptiX OSN 1500 uses the internal clock source as the system clock.
9.2 Clock Working Mode
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T G.781. The modes are as follows:
� Locked mode
� Holdover mode
� Free-run mode
9.2.1 Locked Mode
In the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 1500 traces one clock source from the line clock source, tributary clock source and the external clock source.
9.2.2 Holdover Mode
If all the clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 1500 uses the frequency information stored before the clock source is lost. The frequency information complies with the related phase standard defined in ITU-T G.813.
9.2.3 Free-Run Mode
The OptiX OSN 1500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whose frequency stability is not lower than ±4.6 ppm.
9.3 Clock Outputs
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock outputs.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the following clock outputs:
� Line clock outputs
� Tributary clock outputs
� External clock outputs
For tributary clock outputs, the OptiX OSN 1500 supports the tributary retiming function, which helps improve the quality of the output tributary clock.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports two external clock outputs:
� Two 75-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 171 of 243
� Two 120-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
For external clock outputs, only two 75-ohm or two 120-ohm clocks can be used, but both the clocks cannot be applied.
9.4 Clock Protection
The OptiX OSN 1500 provide the function for managing the SSM. The standard SSM and extended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provide the synchronization status message (SSM) function for synchronous clocks. Either the standard SSM or the extended SSM can be configured to realize the protection switching of clocks.
9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled
In the case of the OptiX OSN 1500, when the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the S1 byte is not used. In this case, the clock sources are selected or switched according to the priority list. The clock source with the highest priority is the tracing source.
The priority list can be manually configured. Figure 9-1 shows the clock configuration and the priority list when the SSM is not enabled.
Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled
Node 3
Node 2
Slot 8 Slot 11
Slot 11 Slot 8
Slot 8
Slot 11
Slot 11
Slot 8
BITS
Priority 1: Slot 11Priority 2: Slot 8Priority 3: Internal
Priority 1: Slot 11
Priority 2: Slot 8Priority 3: Internal
Node 1Priority 1: BITSPriority 2: Internal
Node 4
Priority 1: Slot 8Priority 2: Slot 11Priority 3: Internal
Clocktracing
9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled
The standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 1500 to choose the clock source of the highest quality to prevent the generation of clock tracing ring.
Figure 9-2 shows the application of the standard SSM.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 172 of 243
Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM
Slot 8 Slot 11
Slot 11 Slot 8
Slot 8
Slot 11
Slot 11
Slot 8
BITS
Fiber
break
Node 3, N ode 2 automatically select
the clock source of the highest quality.
Node 2
Node 1
Node 3
Node 4
Clocktracing
9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled
The standard SSM cannot prevent the clock lock ring in all cases. In this case, Huawei provides the concept of the clock source ID.
The extended SSM uses the first four bits of the S1 byte as the clock source ID and the latter four bits to indicate the quality of the clock source. The first four bits of the S1 byte is used to specify the unique ID of a clock source. These four bits are transmitted along with the SSM. When receiving the S1 byte, a node checks if the clock source ID is transmitted by itself. If the clock source ID is transmitted by itself, the node considers the clock source as unavailable. In this way, this avoids the occurrence of the clock lock ring.
Figure 9-3 shows the clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled.
Figure 9-4 shows the application of the clock source ID when the extended SSM is enabled.
Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled
BITSBITSfailure
Clock mutual tracing
caused by BITS failure
Node 2
Node 1
Node 3
Node 4
BITS
Node 2
Node 1
Node 3
Node 4
Clocktracing
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 173 of 243
Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID
Node 2
BITS failure
BITS
Node 1
Node 3
Node 4
Node 1 finds that the ID sent from Node 4 is
1, which is originated from itself. Node 1 will
not trace it to avoid the clock mutual tracing.
Clock tracing
A clock source ID can be manually set. In the case of the configuration of clock protection for an SDH ring network, the clock ID is always manually set, to effectively avoid the occurrence of clock lock ring. The clock ID occurs only at key nodes rather than all the nodes in an SDH network. To set the clock source ID, do as follows:
� Allocate a clock ID for every external BITS.
� Allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every node that has an external BITS.
� In case of signals that travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every junction node.
� In case of signals that travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a clock ID for the line clock source (if any line source is involved at a junction node) in the direction that the signal travels at every junction node.
9.5 Tributary Retiming
The retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing signals from a digital synchronization network, and then to transmit the signals to the receiver.
9.5.1 Retiming Principle
With the retiming technology, the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to transmit reference timing signals.
Figure 9-5 shows the retiming principle.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 174 of 243
Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram
Desynchronization
PLL
Retiming buffer
SECSDH clock
source
Extract clock( f )
Extract clock( f )
f
f
Input tributary signalOutput
tributary signal
1
0
1
0
The retiming function is performed in the following process:
� The phase-lock loop (PLL) is used to extract clock f1 from the received tributary signals.
� The desynchronization function is used to recover the tributary signal data in an error-free manner, and then to store the data in the retiming buffer.
� The SDH equipment clock (SEC) f0, which is synchronous with the digital synchronization network, is extracted and then added into the tributary signal data.
In this way, the output tributary signals carry a good timing reference, which serves the synchronous service equipment.
9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function
PDH signals can pass through an SDH network with or without retiming.
PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network Without Retiming
Figure 9-6 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network without retiming. On the synchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid a periodical slip. When PDH signals are adapted into the SDH transmission network, pointer justifications cause phase jumps of output PDH signals, and thus frequency f1 of the output PDH signals becomes asynchronous with f0. As a result, the frequency of output signals cannot be used as a timing reference for equipment k, such as a digital stored program control (SPC) switch.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 175 of 243
Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming
The tributary signal frequency
cannot be used as a synchronization
clock for equipment k.
SDH transmission network
Synchronous
service
equipment i
S
S
S
S SDH
MUX
Synchronous
service
equipment k
PRC
D
D
D
DSDH
MUX
f1
f1
f0 f0
f1
f1: PDH signal frequency
f0: Frequency that traces an SDH PRC
S: Synchronization
D: Desynchronization
R: Retiming
PRC: SDH primary reference clock
PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network with Retiming
Figure 9-7 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network with retiming. On the synchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid a periodical slip. At the network output end, the retiming function provides a local timing reference f0, and thus jitters and wanders caused by pointer justifications are absorbed. Frequency f1 of the output PDH signals is still synchronous with f0, so equipment k can extract tributary timing signals for the synchronization purpose.
Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming
Synchronous
service
equipmentk
The tributary signal frequency can
be used as a synchronization clock
for equipment k.
Synchronousservice
equipment
i
S
S
S
S SDH
MUX
PRC
R
SDH
MUX
f1
f0
f0 f0
f1
f1: PDH signal frequency
f0: Frequency that traces an SDH PRC
SEC
D
D
D
D
Transmission network
PRC: SDH primary reference clock
S: Synchronization
D: DesynchronizationR: Retiming
f0
SEC: SDH equipment clock
The transmission network in Figure 9-7 can be a single SDH network, or a combination of several SDH and PDH networks.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 177 of 243
10 OAM
10.1 Operation and Maintenance
The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 1500 system are designed according to the customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 1500 system provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers.
Alarm and Performance Management
� In the case of any emergency, the CXL board generates audible and visual alarms to prompt the network administrators to take proper measures.
� The OptiX OSN 1500 provides three alarm input interfaces, one alarm output interface to facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment.
� Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network administrators to locate and handle faults quickly.
� The connectivity of the network cable between NEs can be automatically monitored. After detecting any faults, they automatically report the relevant alarms.
� The working temperature of some boards can be queried.
� When the MSP or TPS switching occurs, the state of an alarm or of a performance event is not changed in the working path. Thus, the service administrator focuses on the service state only.
ALS Function
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH and Ethernet single-mode optical interfaces.
� When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is generated at the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms, the laser of the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically shut down. By default, the laser pulse is generated at the 60-second interval and lasts for 2s every time.
� After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end detects the laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the opposite end then continuously launches laser beams. After receiving the laser beams launched by the opposite end, the laser of the local
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 178 of 243
end then also continuously launches the laser beams. As a result, the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS alarm is cleared.
Optical Power Management
� The OptiX OSN 1500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH and Ethernet optical interfaces.
� The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH optical module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface type, fiber mode (single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance, transmission rate and wavelength.
� The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose single-mode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement. This facilitates the maintenance.
� The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.
Multiple Maintenance Methods
� The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the orderwire phone function for management personnel at different node sites to communicate with each other.
� The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and alarms of each NE in a network.
� The in-service upgrade of the board software and the in-service loading of NE software are supported. The board software and the FPGA can be remotely loaded with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions.
� The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 1500 system.
� The N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1, line boards and Q3CXL1/4/16 support the PRBS test and the remote bit error test.
� The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This function reduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this function, the user is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually interrupt the collection according to the requirement.
� The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the board version replacement function. This helps to replace the board of an old version with the board of a new version. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are the same as the configuration and service status of the old version board.
� Ethernet boards provide the OAM function. This function is used to automatically detect faults in Ethernet, and to help locate and isolate these faults.
� The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and controlled. After a board is inserted, it does not work if the total power consumption of the boards exceeds the power consumption threshold of the equipment.
� The port status can be queried.
10.2 Network Management
The OptiX OSN 1500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000 transmission network management system. The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH,
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 179 of 243
Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP), which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different vendors.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 181 of 243
11 Security Management
11.1 Authentication Management
Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.
� NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a valid user name and a valid password.
� NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each time. For this reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE simultaneously, they need to be switched to ensure that the data is unique.
� Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by simultaneous configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to the NE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at lower level exit from the NE.
� NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower than that of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE.
� NE setting locking: You can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to prevent other users from operating the locked modules.
� Query the online NE users.
11.2 Authorization Management
Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operations performed by each user and the security of the NE system.
� NE user management:
− According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels, which involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, and debugging level in an ascending order.
− According to the T2000, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE users, CMD NE users, and general NE users.
− Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag.
− Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority, or change the user flag.
− Delete NE users.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 182 of 243
� NE user group management:
− According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided into administrator group, super administrator group, operator group, monitoring personnel group, and maintenance personnel group.
− Modify the group of a user.
11.3 Network Security Management
Safe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000 to effectively manage the NEs.
� The T2000 communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL) protocol. Therefore, the data is complete and safe.
� Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the network, and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the ACL rule is divided into basic ACL and advanced ACL.
− For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule only to check the source address of the IP packets only.
− For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL rule. In this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source port, sink port, and protocol type of the received IP packets.
− If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the advanced ACL rule to check the packets.
− Query the ACL rule.
− Modify the ACL rule.
− Delete the ACL rule.
� An NE can access the T2000 by using any of the following methods:
− Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the T2000 to access it over the Ethernet network.
− Access through the serial interface.
− Access through the OAM port.
− Access through the COM port. Owing to the security, after an NE is initialized or downloads data, by default, the COM access function is disabled. The COM access function can be enabled when necessary.
� Control the access to NEs by using LCT: If the T2000-LCT needs to be used to manage NEs, you can enable the LCT access authority allowed by the NE on the T2000.
� When the T2000 communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user name and password) is encrypted.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 183 of 243
11.4 System Security Management
Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executed forcibly.
� Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE.
� Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report an alarm after a user logs in to the NE.
� Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password.
� Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts.
� Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts.
� Query or set the password uniqueness.
11.5 Log Management
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides log management functions.
11.5.1 NE Security Log Management
The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.
� Query the security logs of the NE.
� Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.
11.5.2 Syslog Management
The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports:
� Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol
� Setting of Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP
� Adding and deletion of Syslog servers
� Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers at the same time
� Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog server and the NE
Figure 11-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the security of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are available in a network. Normally, IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and the system log servers. The communication between NEs can be realized through several methods, for example, ECC mode or IP over DCC mode.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 184 of 243
Figure 11-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting
NMS
Syslog Server A
Syslog Server Breal time
security log
TCP/IP
NE A(client)
NE B
NE C
(client)
NE D
ECC/ IP OVER DCC
Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system logs of all NEs in a network.
A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the system log server. In Figure 11-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.
When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly communicate with the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence, configure the IP addresses and port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to transmit the NE logs to the two Syslog servers through the auto addressing function of IP protocol. No forwarding gateway NE is required.
When ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not directly connect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs of the NE must be transmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the Syslog servers through ECC. Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by the gateway NE. Hence, the forwarding gateway NE must be configured, for example, configure NE A as the forwarding gateway NE for NE D.
For detailed Syslog configuration procedures, refer to the OptiX OSN 1500 Optical Transmission System Configuration Guide.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 185 of 243
12 Technical Specifications
12.1 Interface Types
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports optical interfaces of different types.
Table 12-1 lists the optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Interface Type Rate and Feature
SDH optical interface
155520kbit/s, 622080kbit/s, 2488320kbit/s, 2666057 kbit/s
Ethernet interface 10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
ATM interface 34368 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s, 622080 kbit/s
PDH/SDH electrical interface
1544 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s, 34368 kbit/s, 44736 kbit/s, 139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s
DDN electrical interface
RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1
Clock interface OptiX OSN 1500A:
Two 120-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
OptiX OSN 1500B:
Two 75-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Two 120-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Alarm interface Three alarm input interfaces, one alarm output interfaces, alarm concatenated interfaces, four cabinet alarm indicator interfaces
Auxiliary interface Administration interface, orderwire interface, data interface
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 186 of 243
12.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports SDH optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces and ATM optical interfaces. This section lists the specifications of these optical interfaces.
12.2.1 SDH Optical Interface
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types.
Table 12-2 lists the specifications for the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 155 520 kbit/s
Classification code I-1 Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 2 0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 60 60 to 80 80 to 100
Operating wavelength (nm)
1260 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Type of optical source
MLM MLM MLM MLM/SLM
SLM SLM
Mean launched power (dBm)
–15 to –8
–19 to –14
–15 to –8
–5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 0
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
–23 –31 –28 –34 –34 –34
Minimum overload (dBm)
–8 –14 –8 –10 –10 –10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 10 8.2 10 10 10
Table 12-3 lists the specifications for the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-3 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 622 080 kbit/s
Classification code I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 50 50 to 80 80 to 100
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 187 of 243
Item Specification
Operating wavelength (nm)
1261 to 1360
1274 to 1356
1280 to 1335
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Type of optical source MLM MLM SLM SLM SLM
Mean launched power (dBm)
–15 to –8 –15 to –8
–3 to 2 –3 to 2 –3 to 2
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
–23 –28 –28 –28 –34
Minimum overload (dBm) –8 –8 –8 –8 –13
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 8.2 10 10 10.5
Table 12-4 lists the specifications for the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-4 Specifications of the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 2 488 320 kbit/s
Classification code
I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 L-16.2(Je) V-16.2(Je) (BA)
U-16.2(Je) (BA+PA)
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 2 2 to 25 25 to 50 50 to 80 80 to 105 105 to 145
145 to 200
Operating wavelength (nm)
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
1530 to 1560
1530 to 1565
1550.12
Type of optical source
MLM SLM SLM SLM SLM SLM SLM
Without BA: –2 to 3
Without BA and PA: –2 to 3
Mean launched power (dBm)
–10 to –3
–5 to 0 –2 to 3 –2 to 3 5 to 7
With BA: 13 to 15
With BA: 15 to 18
Without BA and PA: –28
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
–18 –18 –27 –28 –28 –28
With PA: –32
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 188 of 243
Item Specification
Without BA and PA: –9
Minimum overload (dBm)
–3 0 –9 –9 –9 –9
With PA: –10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Maximum chromatic dispersion
(ps/nm)
12 - - 1200 to 1600
2000 2800 3400
Table 12-5 lists the specifications for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 2 666 057 kbit/s
Classification code Ue-16.2c Ue-16.2d Ue-16.2f
Code contenta SF16+BA(14dB)+
PA SF16+BA(17dB)+PA
SF16+BA(17dB)+RA+PA
Operating wavelength (nm) 1550.12 1550.12 1550.12
Without BA and PA: –5 to –1
Without BA and PA: –5 to –1
Without BA, RA and PA: –5 to –1
Mean launched power (dBm)
With BA: 13 to 15 With BA: 13 to 15 With BA: 15 to 18
Without BA and PA: –27.5
Without BA and PA: –27.5
Without BA, RA and PA: –27.5
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
With PA: –37 With PA: –37 With PA: –42
Minimum overload point (dBm) b –10 –10 –10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) c 10 10 10
a: The number in the bracket indicates the corresponding parameter, for example, BA (14) indicates that the optical power
of the signal after it is amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC+BA+PA" indicates that the optical interface specifications
include FEC, BA and PA.
b: The parameter is that of the PA.
c: Parameters in the table are of the optical modules, excluding the amplifiers.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 189 of 243
The STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500 can output wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be directly added to the WDM system. Table 12-6 lists the wavelengths and frequencies of the STM-16 optical interfaces.
Table 12-6 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 optical interfaces
No. Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
No. Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
1 192.1 1560.61 21 194.1 1544.53
2 192.2 1559.79 22 194.2 1543.73
3 192.3 1558.98 23 194.3 1542.94
4 192.4 1558.17 24 194.4 1542.14
5 192.5 1557.36 25 194.5 1541.35
6 192.6 1556.56 26 194.6 1540.56
7 192.7 1555.75 27 194.7 1539.77
8 192.8 1554.94 28 194.8 1538.98
9 192.9 1554.13 29 194.9 1538.19
10 193.0 1553.33 30 195.0 1537.40
11 193.1 1552.52 31 195.1 1536.61
12 193.2 1551.72 32 195.2 1535.82
13 193.3 1550.92 33 195.3 1535.04
14 193.4 1550.12 34 195.4 1534.25
15 193.5 1549.32 35 195.5 1533.47
16 193.6 1548.51 36 195.6 1532.68
17 193.7 1547.72 37 195.7 1531.90
18 193.8 1546.92 38 195.8 1531.12
19 193.9 1546.12 39 195.9 1530.33
20 194.0 1545.32 40 196.0 1529.55
Table 12-7 lists the specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-7 Specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 2 488 320 kbit/s 2 666 057 kbit/s
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 190 of 243
Item Specification
Dispersion limit (km) 170 640 640
Mean launched power (dBm) –2 to 3 –5 to –1 –5 to –1
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
–28 –28 –28
Minimum overload point (dBm)
–9 –9 –9
Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/nm)
3400 12800 12800
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10
With FEC: 16 OSNR Without FEC: 21
Without FEC: 21
12.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types.
The specification of the Ethernet optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500 equipment comply with IEEE 802.3 standards. Table 12-8 lists the specifications.
Table 12-8 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces
Interface Type
Type of Optical Source
Transmitting Optical Power (dBm)
Central Wavelength (nm)
Minimum Overload Point (dBm)
Receiver Minimum Sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum Extinction Ratio (dB)
1000Base-ZX (70 km)
MLM –4 to 2 1480 to 1580
–3 –22 9
1000Base-ZX (40 km)
MLM –2 to 5 1270 to 1355
–3 –23 9
1000Base-LX (10 km)
MLM –9 to –3 1270 to 1355
–3 –19 9
1000Base-SX (0.55 km)
MLM –9.5 to 0 770 to 860 0 –17 9
100Base-FX (15 km)
MLM –15 to –8 1261 to 1360
–7 –28 10
100Base-FX (2 km)
MLM –19 to –14 1270 to 1380
–14 –30 10
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 191 of 243
12.2.3 ATM Optical Interface
The ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.
Table 12-9 and Table 12-10 list the specifications of the ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-9 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 60 60 to 80 80 to 100
Operating wavelength (nm)
1260 to 1360
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Type of optical source MLM MLM MLM/SLM
SLM SLM
Mean launched power (dBm)
–19 to –14
–15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 0
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
–31 –28 –34 –34 –34
Minimum overload (dBm)
–14 –8 –10 –10 –10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
10 8.2 10 10 10
Table 12-10 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item Specification
Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s
Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2
Transmission distance (km)
2 to 20 20 to 50 50 to 80 80 to 100
Operating wavelength (nm)
1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Type of optical source MLM SLM SLM SLM
Mean launched power (dBm)
-15 to -8 -3 to 2 -3 to 2 -3 to 2
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
–28 –28 –28 –34
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 192 of 243
Item Specification
Minimum overload (dBm)
–8 –8 –8 –13
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 10 10 10.5
12.2.4 Laser Safety Class
The safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M.
Table 12-11 lists the safety classes of lasers used for the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-11 Laser safety class
Laser Safety Class Board
CLASS 1 N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A, N1SF16, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4, R1SL4, N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, R1SLD4, N1SLT1, N1SLQ1A, N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, R1SLQ1, N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1, R1SL1, N2SLO1, N1EGT2, N2EGS2, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N2EGR2, N2EMR0, N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1, N1MST4, N1OU08, N2OU08, N1EFF8, Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4, Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16, R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1, R1CXLQ1, R1CXLL4, R1CXLD4, R1CXLQ4, R1CXLL16
CLASS 1M BA2, BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA, N1FIB, ROP, N1MR2A, N1MR2B, N1MR2C, N1LWX, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4
12.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical interfaces and auxiliary interfaces.
12.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types.
Table 12-12 lists the specifications of the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 193 of 243
Table 12-12 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces
Interface Type 1544 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
34368 kbit/s
44736 kbit/s
139264 kbit/s
155520 kbit/s
Code B8ZS, AMI
HDB3 HDB3 B3ZS CMI CMI
Signal bit rate at the output interface
Attenuation tolerance at the input interface
Frequency deviation tolerance at the input interface
ITU-T G.703-compliant
Anti-interference capability of input interface
ITU-T G.703-compliant
- - - -
12.3.2 DDN Interface
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports DDN interfaces.
Table 12-13 lists the DDN interface types.
Table 12-13 DDN interface types
Interface Type Description Standard
Framed E1 interface type
Framed E1 signal
Physical and electrical features comply with ITU-T G.703. The frame structure complies with ITU-T G.704.
V.35 interface Complies with ITU-T V.35.
V.24 interface Complies with ITU-T V.24.
X.21 interface Complies with ITU-T X.21.
RS-449 interface
Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A, RS-422A).
RS-530 interface
Complies with EIA RS-530.
N x 64 kbit/s interface
RS-530A interface
Complies with EIA RS-530A.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 194 of 243
12.3.3 Auxiliary Interface
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides many auxiliary interfaces.
RS-232 Interfaces
Table 12-14 lists the specifications of the RS-232 electrical interfaces. The RS-232 interfaces are S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the EOW or S1 and S2 interfaces on the AMU.
Table 12-14 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces
Item Specification
Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum
Mode RS-232 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical level ±5 V to ±15 V
RS-422 Interfaces
Table 12-15 lists the specifications of the RS-422 electrical interfaces. The RS-422 interfaces are S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the EOW or S1 and S2 interfaces on the AMU.
Table 12-15 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces
Item Specification
Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum
Mode RS-422 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical level ±2.0 V
Orderwire Phone Interface
Table 12-16 lists the specifications of the orderwire phone interfaces.
Table 12-16 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface
Item Specification
Speech channel interface
Impedance 600 ohms
Bandwidth 300 Hz to 3400 Hz
Operating current 18 mA
Input gain –4/0/0 dB
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 195 of 243
Item Specification
Output gain 0/–7/0 dB
Signaling DTMF compliant with ITU-T Q.23
12.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
The clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with related ITU-T Recommendations.
12.4.1 Clock Interface Type
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output interfaces.
Table 12-17 lists the clock features of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-17 Clock features
Clock Type Feature
External synchronization source
OptiX OSN 1500A:
Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock inputs
OptiX OSN 1500B:
Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock inputs
Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock inputs
Synchronization output
OptiX OSN 1500A:
Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock outputs
OptiX OSN 1500B:
Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock outputs
Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock outputs
12.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance
The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with ITU-T G.813.
Table 12-18 lists the timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 equipment.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 196 of 243
Table 12-18 Timing and synchronization performance
Output Jitter Output Frequency of Internal Oscillator in the Free-Run Mode
Long-Term Phase Variation in the Locked Mode
G.813 compliant
G.813 compliant G.813 compliant
12.5 Transmission Performance
The transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with ITU-T standards.
Table 12-19 lists the performance of the output jitter and bit error in an SDH/PDH network.
Table 12-19 Transmission performance
Jitter at STM-N Interface
Jitter at PDH Interface Bit Error
G.813/G.825 compliant G.823/G.783 compliant G.826 compliant
12.6 Timeslot Numbering
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12.
Table 12-20 and Table 12-21 list the details.
Table 12-20 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I)
TUG2 (7-1) TUG2 (7-2)
TUG2 (7-3)
TUG (7-4) TUG (7-5) TUG (7-6) TUG (7-7)
TU-3 (3-1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
TU-3 (3-2) 22 23 24 25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
TU-3 (3-3) 43 44 45 46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 197 of 243
Table 12-21 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II)
TUG2 (7-1) TUG2 (7-2)
TUG2 (7-3)
TUG2 (7-4)
TUG2 (7-5)
TUG2 (7-6)
TUG2 (7-7)
TU-3 (3-1) 1 22 43 4 25 46 7 28
49
10
31
52
13
34
55
16
37
58
19
40
61
TU-3 (3-2) 2 23 44 5 26 47 8 29
50
11
32
53
14
35
56
17
38
59
20
41
62
TU-3 (3-3) 3 24 45 6 27 48 9 30
51
12
33
54
15
36
57
18
39
60
21
42
63
12.7 Power Supply Specification
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the input of –48 V or –60 V DC power supply.
Table 12-22 lists the specifications of the power supply.
Table 12-22 Power supply specifications
Item Specification
Power supply mode DC power supply
Nominal voltage –48 V or –60 V
Voltage range –38.4 V to –57.6 V or –48 V to –72 V
Maximum power consumption
OptiX OSN 1500A: 200 W
OptiX OSN 1500B: 280 W
Maximum current OptiX OSN 1500A: 4.5 A
OptiX OSN 1500B: 6 A
12.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards
Different boards have different power consumption and weight.
Table 12-23 lists the power consumption and weight of the boards.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 198 of 243
Table 12-23 Power consumption and weight of the boards
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
SDH Processing Boards
N1SLT1 15 1.2 N1SLQ4 16 1.0
N1SLQ1 15 1.0 N1SLQ4A 17 1.0
N1SLQ1A 17 1.0 N2SLQ4 16 1.0
N2SLQ1 15 1.0 N1SLD4 15 1.0
R1SLQ1 12 0.54 N1SLD4A 17 1.0
N1SL1, N2SL1
14 1.0 N2SLD4 15 1.0
N1SL1A 17 1.0 R1SLD4 11 0.5
R1SL1 10 0.5 N1SL4, N2SL4
15 1.0
N1SF16 26 1.1 N1SL4A 17 1.0
N1SL16, N2SL16
20 1.1 R1SL4 10 0.5
N3SL16 22 1.1 N1SL16A, N2SL16A
20 1.1
N1SEP1 17 1.0 N3SL16A 17 0.9
PDH Processing Boards
N1PQM 22 1.0 N2PQ3 13 0.9
N1SPQ4 24 0.9 N1PL3 15 1.0
N2SPQ4 24 0.9 N1PL3A 15 1.1
N1PQ1 19 1.0 N2PL3 12 0.9
N2PQ1 13 1.0 N1PD3 19 1.1
R1PL1A、R1PL1B
7 0.5 N2PD3 12 0.9
R1PD1 15 0.5 N2PD3 12 0.9
R2PD1 10 0.6 N1DXA 10 0.8
N1DX1 15 1.0 - - -
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 199 of 243
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
Interface Boards and Protection Switching Boards
N1EU08 11 0.4 N1ETS8 0 (before the TPS switching); 3 (after the TPS switching)
0.4
N1MU04 2 0.4 N1TSB4 3 0.3
N1OU08 6 0.4 N1TSB8 0 (before the TPS switching); 5 (after the TPS switching)
0.3
N2OU08 6 0.4 N1C34S 0 (before the TPS switching); 2 (after the TPS switching)
0.3
N1EU04 6 0.4 N1D12S 0 (before the TPS switching); 9 (after the TPS switching)
0.4
R1L75S 5 0.3 N1D34S 0 (before the TPS switching); 2 (after the TPS switching)
0.4
R1L12S 3 0.2 N1D75S 0 (before the TPS switching); 6 (after the TPS switching)
0.4
N1DM12 0 (before the TPS switching); 8 (after the TPS switching)
0.5 N1D12B 0 0.3
N1ETF8 2 0.4 - - -
Data Processing Boards
N1EGS4 70 1.1 N1EFF8 6 0.4
N3EGS4 70 1.1 N1EFS0 35 1.0
N2EGR2 40 1.1 N2EFS0 35 1.0
N2EGS2 43 1.0 N4EFS0 35 1.0
N1EGT2 29 0.9 N1EFS4 30 1.0
N2EMR0 50 1.2 N2EFS4 30 1.0
N1EMS4 65 (without an interface board); 75 (with an interface board)
1.1 N1ADQ1 41 1.0
R1EFT4 14 0.5 N1ADL4 41 0.9
N1EFT8 26 1.0 N1IDL4 41 1.0
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 200 of 243
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
Board Power Consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
N1EFT8A 26 1.0 N1IDQ1 41 1.0
N1MST4 26 0.9 - - -
Cross-connect and System Control Boards
Q2CXL16, Q2CXL4, Q2CXL1
40 1.1 R1CXLQ4, R1CXLQ1, R1CXLD4, R1CXLD1, R1CXLL16, R1CXLL4, R1CXLL1
50 1.0
Q3CXL16, Q3CXL4, Q3CXL1
46 1.2 - - -
Other Boards
N1LWX 30 1.1 TN11CMR2 0.2 0.8
N1MR2B 0 1.0 TN11CMR4 0.2 0.9
N1MR2C 0 1.0 N1FIB 0 0.4
TN11MR2 0.2 0.9 TN11OBU1 16 1.3
TN11MR4 0.2 0.9 R1FAN 20 1.0
N1BA2 20 1.0 AUX 19 1.0
N1BPA 20 1.0 R1AMU 8 0.5
N2BPA 11 1.2 EOW 10 0.4
PIU, PIUA 2 1.3 - - -
12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility
The OptiX OSN 1500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests.
Table 12-24 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications.
Table 12-24 EMC test results
Item Standard
Radiated emission CISPR22 Class
AEN55022 Class A
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 201 of 243
Item Standard
Conducted emission for DC port CISPR22 Class A
EN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for signal ports CISPR22 Class A
EN55022 Class A
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Field
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz–2700 MHz: 10 V/m)
Immunity to electrostatic discharge ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-2 (Air Discharge:±8 kV; Contact Discharge:±6 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for DC ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-4(±1 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2
IEC 61000-4-4(±1 kV)
Immunity to surges for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-5(Line to Line: ±1 kV, Line to Ground: ±2 kV)
Immunity to surges for signal ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-5(±1 kV)
Immunity to continuous conducted interference for DC ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-6(10 V)
Immunity to continuous conducted interference for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-6(10 V)
Immunity To Continuous Voltage dips and Short Interruption and Voltage Variation for DC Power Port
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-29
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 202 of 243
12.10 Safety Certification
The OptiX OSN 1500 has received several safety certifications.
Table 12-25 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 1500 has received.
Table 12-25 Safety certifications
Item Standard
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
CISPR22 Class A
CISPR24
EN55022 Class A
EN50024
ETSI EN 300 386 Class A
ETSI ES 201 468
CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A
ICES 003 Class A
AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A
GB9254 Class A
VCCI Class A
Safety IEC 60950-1
IEC/EN41003
EN 60950-1
UL 60950-1
CSA C22.2 No 60950-1
AS/NZS 60950-1
BS EN 60950-1
IS 13252
GB4943
Laser safety FDA rules
21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11
IEC60825-1
IEC60825-2
EN60825-1
EN60825-2
GB7247
Health ICNIRP Guideline
1999-519-EC
EN 50385
OET Bulletin 65
IEEE Std C95.1
Environment protection RoHS
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 203 of 243
12.11 Environmental Specification
The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper environment for normal operation.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can operate normally for a long term in the environment defined in Table 12-26.
Table 12-26 Environment specifications for long-term operation
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature 0℃ to 45℃
Relative humidity 10% to 90%
Anti-seismic performance ETS300-019-2-3-AMD
12.12 Environment Requirement
The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a different environment for storage, transportation and operation. This section lists the environment requirements.
The following international standards are taken as the reference for specifying the environment requirements.
� ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly temperature-controlled location
� NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection
12.12.1 Environment for Storage
The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for storage.
Climate
Table 12-27 lists the climate requirements for storage.
Table 12-27 Climate requirements for storage
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature –40℃ to +70℃
Temperature change rate ≤ 1 ℃/min
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 204 of 243
Item Range
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Air flowing speed ≤ 30 m/s
Waterproof Requirement
The requirement for storing the equipment on the customer site is that generally, the equipment must be stored indoors.
There should be no water on the floor or water entering the equipment carton. The equipment should be placed away from places where there are possibilities of water leakage, such as near the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities.
If the equipment is stored outdoors, ensure that following conditions are met.
� The carton must be intact.
� Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the carton.
� There should be no water on the ground where the carton is placed.
� The carton must be free from direct exposure to sunlight.
Biological Environment
� Avoid the growth of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete.
� Take anti-rodent measures.
Air Cleanness
� The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust.
� The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 12-28.
Table 12-28 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage
Mechanical Active Substance Content
Suspending dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Precipitable dust ≤ 20.0 mg/m2·h
Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3
� The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 12-29.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 205 of 243
Table 12-29 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage
Chemical Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 12-30 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.
Table 12-30 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage
Item Sub-Item Range
Acceleration spectral density
- 0.02 m2/s3 -
Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 50 Hz 50 Hz to 100 Hz
Random vibration
dB/oct +12 - -12
12.12.2 Environment for Transportation
The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for transportation.
Climate
Table 12-31 lists the climate requirements for transportation.
Table 12-31 Climate requirements for transportation
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature –40℃ to +70℃
Temperature change rate ≤ 1℃/min
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 206 of 243
Item Range
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Air flowing speed ≤ 30 m/s
Waterproof Requirement
Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
� The carton must be intact.
� Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the carton.
� There should be no water in the transportation tool.
Biological Environment
� Avoid the growth of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete.
� Take anti-rodent measures.
Air Cleanness
� The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust.
� The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 12-32.
Table 12-32 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation
Mechanical Active Substance Content
Suspending dust No requirement
Precipitable dust ≤ 3.0 mg/m2·h
Gravel ≤ 100 mg/m3
� The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 12-33.
Table 12-33 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation
Chemical Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 207 of 243
Chemical Active Substance Content
NO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 3.00 mg/m3
Cl2 -
HCl ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.03 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 12-34 lists the requirements for transporting the OptiX OSN 1500 equipment.
Table 12-34 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation
Item Sub-Item Range
Acceleration spectral density
1 m2/s
3 –3 dBA Random vibration
Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 200 Hz
Impact response spectrum I (sample weight > 50 kg)
100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times on each surface
Impact
Impact response spectrum II (sample weight ≤ 50 kg)
180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 times on
each surface
Weight (kg) Height (m)
<10 1.0
<15 1.0
<20 0.8
<30 0.6
<40 0.5
<50 0.4
<100 0.3
Fall-off
>100 0.1
NOTE
Impact response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the equipment that is spurred by a specified impact. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 208 of 243
12.12.3 Environment for Operation
The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for operation.
Climate
Table 12-35 and Table 12-36 list the climate requirements for operation of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-35 Requirements for temperature and humidity
Temperature Relative Humidity
Long-term operation
Short-term operation Long-term operation
Short-term operation
0℃ to 45℃ –5℃ to 55℃ 10% to 90% 5% to 95%
NOTE
The temperature and humidity values are tested in a place that is 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of the equipment. Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.
Table 12-36 Other climatic requirements
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature change rate ≤ 30℃/h
Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Air flowing speed ≤ 5 m/s
Biological Environment
� Avoid the growth of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete.
� Take anti-rodent measures.
Air Cleanness
� The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust.
� The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 12-37.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 209 of 243
Table 12-37 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance
Mechanical Active Substance
Content
Dust particle ≤ 3 x 105 particles/m3
Suspending dust ≤ 0.2 mg/m3
Precipitable dust ≤ 1.5 mg/m2·h
Gravel ≤ 20 mg/m3
� The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 12-38.
Table 12-38 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation
Chemical Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
NOX ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 12-39 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation.
Table 12-39 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation
Item Sub-Item Range
Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s -
Acceleration - ≤ 2 m/s2
Sinusoidal vibration
Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Impact response spectrum II
Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times
on each surface Impact
Static load 0 kPa
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 210 of 243
Item Sub-Item Range
NOTE
Impact response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by an equipment that is spurred by a specified impact. Static load is the pressure from the top, which the equipment with package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 211 of 243
A Compliant Standards
This chapter lists the standards that OptiX OSN 1500 complies with.
A.1 ITU-T Recommendations
Table A-1 ITU-T recommendations
Recommendation Description
G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable
G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fiber and cable
G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical fiber amplifiers
G.662 Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems
G.663 Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems
G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems
G.691 Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH systems with optical amplifiers
G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid
G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces
G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44736kbit/s hierarchical levels
G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP)
G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 212 of 243
Recommendation Description
G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems
G.774 1-5 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the network element view
G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect detection and clearance criteria
G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks
G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in synchronization networks
G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy.
G.824 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 1544kbit/s hierarchy.
G.825 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).
G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate.
G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).
G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
G.842 Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures
G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables
I.121 Broadband aspects of ISDN
I.150 B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics
I.311 B-ISDN general network aspects
I.321 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
I.361 B-ISDN ATM layer specification
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 213 of 243
Recommendation Description
I.630 ATM protection switching
M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network
Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
Q.812 Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
V.24 List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
V.35 Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHz group band circuits
V.28 Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current interchange circuits
X.21 Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) which is designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series modems
X.86 Ethernet over LAPS
A.2 IEEE Standards
Table A-2 IEEE standards
Standard Description
IEEE 802.17 Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.1ad Virtual bridged local area networks — Amendment 4: Provider bridges
IEEE 802.1ag Connectivity fault management
IEEE 802.1d Media access control (MAC) bridges
IEEE 802.1q Virtual bridged local area networks
IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification
IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ah Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, medium attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type 100Base-T
IEEE 802.3x Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for 802.3 full duplex operation
IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 214 of 243
A.3 IETF Standards
Table A-3 IETF standards
Standard Description
RFC 2615 (1999) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH
RFC 1662 (1994) PPP in HDLC-like Framing
RFC 1661 (1994) The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
RFC 2514 Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECT-IDENTITIES for ATM management
RFC 3031 Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Architecture
RFC 3032 MPLS Label Stack Encoding
A.4 ANSI Standards
Table A-4 ANSI related standards
Standard Description
ANSI X3.296 SBCON (ESCON): FICON
ANSI X3.230 Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)
A.5 Environment Related Standards
Table A-5 Environment related standards
Standard Description
IEC 60068-2 Basic environmental testing procedures
IEC 60068-3-3 Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information - Subpart 3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments
IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake vibration
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 1: Storage
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 215 of 243
Standard Description
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3: Stationary use at weatherprotected locations
ETS 300 019-1-1 Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations
ETS 300 019-1-3: Partly temperature-controlled location
NEBS GR-63-CORE
Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements: Physical protection
A.6 EMC Standards
Table A-6 EMC related standards
Standard Description
IEC 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test
IEC 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-4
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-4: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test
IEC 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-5
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-5: Testing and measurement techniques-Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-6
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-6: Testing and measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
IEC 61000-4-29
EN 61000-4-29
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing and measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and voltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests
CISPR 22/EN 55022 Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
CISPR 24/EN 55024 Information technology equipment-immunity charateristics-Limits and methods of measurement
ETSI EN 300386 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM); Telecommunication network equipment; ElectroMagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 216 of 243
Standard Description
ETSI EN 201468 Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM); Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific applications
ETSI EN 300132-2 Power supply interface at the input totelecommunications equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc).
A.7 Safety Compliance Standards
Table A-7 Safety compliance related standards
Standard Description
EN 60950 Information technology equipment - safety
IEC 950 Safety of information technology equipment including electrical business equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 1-M94
Audio, video and similar electronic equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 950-95
Safety of information technology equipment
73/23/EEC Low voltage directive
UL 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
A.8 Protection Standards
Table A-8 Protection related standards
Standard Description
IEC 61024-1 Protection of structures against lightning
IEC 61312-1 Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I: general principles
IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test
ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
ITU-T K.20 Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to overvoltages and overcurrents
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 217 of 243
Standard Description
ITU-T K.27 Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunication building
ITU-T K.41 Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication centres to surge overvoltages
A.9 ASON Standards
Table A-9 ASON related standards
Standard Description
G.807 Requirements for automatic switched transport networks (ASTN)
G.8080 Architecture for the automatically switched optical network (ASON)
G.7712 Architecture and specification of data communication network
G.7713 Distributed call and connection management (DCM) based on PNNI
G.7714 Protocol for automatic discovery in SDH and OTN networks
G.7715 ASON routing architecture and requirements for link state protocols
G.7716 Control plane initial establishment, reconfiguration and recovery
G.7717 Connection admission control
G.7718 Framework for ASON management
RFC 3471 (GMPLS)
Signaling functional description
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 219 of 243
B Basic Principle
The basic principle includes the SDH basic principle, Ethernet basic principle, and ATM basic principle.
B.1 Introduction to SDH
This section describes the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) levels, multiplexing structures, frame structures, and overhead bytes.
B.1.1 SDH Levels
The first level bit rate of SDH is 155520 kbit/s. Signals of higher levels can be generated by interleaving N signals of the base SDH level (N=4, 16, 64).
See Table B-1.
Table B-1 SDH levels and the corresponding bit rates
SDH level Bit rate (kbit/s)
STM-1 155520
STM-4 622080
STM-16 2488320
STM-64 9953280
STM-64 (out-of-band FEC) 10664228
B.1.2 Multiplexing Structure
The multiplexing structure of the equipment complies with the requirements specified in the ITU-T Recommendations.
The multiplexing structure of OptiX OSN products series is shown in Figure B-1.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 220 of 243
Figure B-1 Multiplexing structure
STM-64
STM-16
STM-4
STM-1
AU-4-64c
AU-4-16c
AU-4-4c
AU-4AUG-1
VC-4-64c
VC-4-16c
VC-4-4c
VC-4
TUG-3
TUG-2
TU-12 VC-12 C-12
C4-64c
C4-16c
C4-4c
C-4
× 3
× 7
×3
×4
×16
× 64
×4 ×16
×4
Pointer
justification
Multiplexing
Aligning
MappingTU-11 VC-11 C-11
AU-3 VC-3 C-3
×4
×3 TU-3 VC-3×1
B.1.3 Basic Frame Structure
The SDH basic frame structure consists of the RSOH, MSOH, POH, AU pointer, and payload.
Figure B-2 shows the STM-N frame structure.
Figure B-2 STM-N frame structure
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
STM-N payload
Payload
RSOH
Multiplex section overhead
MSOH
9 rows
Transmission direction
270 X N columns (bytes)
9 X N columns (bytes) 261 X N columns (bytes)
Information code stream
9 X 270 X N bytesFrame cycle: 125 s
Regenerator section overhead
Administrative unit pointer (s) AU-PTR
Hig
h-o
rde
r p
ath
overh
ea
d P
OH
Frame n-1
T=125 s
Frame n Frame n+1
Scrambler: X 7+ X 6 +1
µ
µ
B.1.4 SOH Description
The SOH bytes include STM-1 SOH bytes, STM-4 SOH bytes, STM-16 SOH bytes, and STM-64 SOH bytes.
STM-1 SOH
Figure B-3 shows the structure of STM-1 SOH.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 221 of 243
Figure B-3 STM-1 SOH
AU-PTR
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0* *
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 M1 E2
RSOH
MSOH
9rows
9 columns
X Bytes reserved for national use
* Unscrambled bytes
Media dependent bytes
Note: All unmarked bytes are reserved for
future international standardization
(for media dependent,additional national use
and other purpose).
Serial1
Serial2
Serial4
Serial
3
STM-4 SOH
Figure B-4 shows the structure of STM-4 SOH.
Figure B-4 STM-4 SOH
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 Z0 Z0 Z0* * * * * * * *
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 M1 E2
***
9
rows
36 columns
RSOH
MSOH
AU-PTR
x Bytes reserved for national use
* Unscrambled bytes
Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization(for media dependent, additional national use and other purpose).
STM-16 SOH
Figure B-5 shows the structure of STM-16 SOH.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 222 of 243
Figure B-5 STM-16 SOH
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 * * *
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
*Z0
*
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 E2
M1
144 columns
AU-PTR9rows
x Bytes reserved for national use
* Unscrambled bytes
Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization
(for media dependent, additional national use and other purpose).
STM-64 SOH
Figure B-6 shows the structure of STM-64 SOH.
Figure B-6 STM-64 SOH
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0* * *
B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
*Z0
*
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
D7 D8 D9
D10 D11 D12
S1 E2
M1
576 columns
AU-PTR9
rows
x Bytes reserved for national use
* Unscrambled bytes
Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization
(for media dependent, additional national use and other purpose).
SOH Bytes Description
Table B-2 SOH bytes description
Byte Description
A1, A2 Framing byte (A1 = F6H, A2 = 28H)
B1 Regenerator section error monitoring BIP-8 byte
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 223 of 243
Byte Description
B2 Multiplex section error monitoring BIP-24×N byte
D1, D2 and D3 Regenerator section DCC channel byte, 192 kbit/s
D4–D12 Multiplex section DCC channel byte, 576 kbit/s
E1 Regenerator section orderwire byte, 64 kbit/s
E2 Multiplex section orderwire byte, 64 kbit/s
F1 User channel byte (to provide temporary data/voice channel connections for special maintenance purpose)
H1, H2 Administrative unit pointer byte
H3 Positive or negative justification opportunity byte
J0 Regenerator section trace byte
K1, K2 (b1–b5) Multiplex section automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte
K2 (b6–b8) Multiplex section remote defect indication (MS-RDI) byte
M1 Multiplex section remote error indication (MS-REI) byte
S1 (b5–b8) Synchronization status byte
Serial 1–4 Broadcast data byte
Others To be determined
B.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description
The POH bytes include the higher order POH bytes and lower order POH bytes.
Higher Order Path Overhead Description
Table B-3 VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-xc POH bytes description
Byte Description
J1 Path trace byte
B3 Path BIP-8 byte
C2 Signal label byte
G1 Path status byte
F2, F3 Path user channels byte
H4 Position indicator byte
K3 (b1-b4) Automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 224 of 243
Byte Description
K3 (b5-b8) Spare byte
N1 Network operator byte
NOTE
The VC-4 POH is located in the first column of the 9-row in the 261-column VC-4 structure.
The VC-4-xc POH is located in the first column of the 9-row in the 261 x X-column VC-4-Xc structure (cascaded by X VC-4s).
Lower Order Path Overhead Description
Table B-4 VC-12 POH bytes description
Byte Description
V5 V5 byte (error checking, signal label and path status)
J2 Path trace byte
N2 Network operator byte
K4 Automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte
B.2 Introduction to ATM
This section describes the ATM cell structure and provides an overview of the ATM technology.
B.2.1 Introduction to ATM
The OptiX OSN product series can transmit, converge, and forward ATM services.
Definition of ATM
The asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a cell-based technology, which consists of the transmission, multiplexing, and switching technologies. The switching technology of the ATM combines the advantages of packet switching and circuit switching. The ATM adopts the statistical multiplexing mode to realize fast packet switching. In this way, the ATM ensures the bandwidth utilization efficiency, and supports the real-time services of high rates and low rates.
Advantages of ATM
� Sharing and statistic multiplexing of line bandwidth
� Capable of carrying multiple types of services and providing Quality of Service (QoS) service
� High-speed hardware switching because of fixed cell length
� Mature in technology and high standardization
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 225 of 243
� Extensive support from the telecommunication field
� Good network interconnection and interworking capability
In the OSN product series, inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA) technology is used to transmit ATM services. That is, a high-speed ATM link is transmitted over multiple low-speed physical links. For example, three E1s are used to transmit one 6 Mbit/s ATM link through IMA technology.
B.2.2 ATM Cell Structure
An ATM cell is of a fixed length, which is 53 bytes. An ATM cell consists of the cell header and cell payload.
Figure B-7 shows the ATM cell structure.
Figure B-7 ATM cell structure
Header(5 bytes)
Payload
(48 bytes)
GFC VPI
VPI VCI
VCI
VCI PT CLP
HEC
VPI
VPI VCI
VCI
VCI PT CLP
HEC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ATM cell UNI header structure NNI header structure
GFC: general flow control VPI : virtual path identification VCI : virtual channel identificationPT : payload type CLP : cell loss priority HEC : header error control
UNI : user network interface NNI : network node interface
The contents of the ATM cell header at the UNI are slightly different from the contents of the ATM cell header at the NNI. The difference is that the ATM cell header at the UNI contains GFC requirements.
B.3 Introduction to Ethernet
This section describes the Ethernet basic principle and frame structure.
B.3.1 Basic Technologies
The equipment supports the transmission of Ethernet services.
Half-Duplex CSMA/CD
According to the initial design objective of Ethernet, the computers and other digital equipment are connected through a shared physical line. The computers and digital equipment connected in this way must enter the physical line in the half-duplex mode. In addition, the design must provide a mechanism to detect and avoid conflict, and to prevent equipment contending for the line at the same time. This is called CSMA/CD.
A piece of terminal equipment detects the status of the shared line continuously and transmits data only in the idle status. Otherwise, it waits until the line is idle. At this time, if another piece of equipment transmits data, the data sent by the two inevitably conflicts, making the signal on the line unstable. After detecting the conflict, the
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 226 of 243
terminal equipment stops transmitting the data quickly and then sends a succession of interfering pulse. After waiting for a period of time, it sends the data again.
The purpose of sending the interfering pulse is to notify the other equipment, that is, the equipment that sends the data at the same time, that a conflict occurs on the line. The waiting time after detection of conflict is random but gradually increases.
Full-Duplex Ethernet and Ethernet Switch
In 1990, the appearance of the 10BAST-T Ethernet based on the twisted pair cable is the most important event in the history of Ethernet. Using twisted pair cable as the transmission medium of Ethernet not only increases the flexibility and reduces the cost, but also introduces the full duplex mode, which is an efficient operation mode.
In the full-duplex mode, the data is transmitted and received simultaneously. The traditional network equipment hub does not support full-duplex, because inside the hub is a bus, over which data is transmitted and received, therefore there is no way for full-duplex communication. To achieve full-duplex, a new type of equipment namely the switch must be introduced.
The switch and the hub are the same in appearance. They both have multiple ports, each of which connects to the terminal equipment and other multiple-port equipment. Instead of a shared bus, there is a digital cross-connect network inside the switch, which temporarily connects every terminal, enabling the terminals to transmit data independently. In addition, the switch sets a buffer area for each port, storing the data transmitted from terminals temporarily, and performs switching after idle resources are available. It is the appearance of the switch that changes the original 10/100 Mbit/s shared structure to 20/200 Mbit/s exclusive structure, greatly enhancing the transmission efficiency. In addition, certain software can be added to the switch to implement additional services, such as VLAN, priority, redundant link.
Auto Negotiation
In actual situations, Ethernet can transmit data in the full duplex mode or half duplex mode at the rate of 10 Mbit/s, or 100 Mbit/s, through type 5 twisted pair cable or type 3 twisted pair. If each terminal equipment is configured manually, it will be difficult to maintain the equipment. Auto negotiation provides a solution for addressing this problem.
Through auto negotiation, the equipment at both ends of a physical link selects a transmission mode automatically by exchanging information. Auto negotiation is based on the Ethernet connected by using a twisted pair cable, which is only effective for such an Ethernet. The contents of auto negotiation include the duplex mode, bit rate, flow control. If the negotiation passes, the equipment at both ends of the link works in the mode negotiated.
B.3.2 Ethernet Frame Structure
The OptiX OSN product series support Ethernet frame structures of three protocol types: Ethernet_II, 802.3, and Ethernet_SNAP.
Figure B-8 shows the Ethernet frame structure of OSN product series.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 227 of 243
Figure B-8 Ethernet frame structure
Destination
MACFCSDataProtocol typeSource MAC
6 6 2 446-1500
Ethernet_II
DestinationMAC
FCSSource MAC
43-1497
802.3
Ethernet_SNAP
DSAPSSAP CTL
1
DestinationMAC
FCSSource MAC
38-1492
0xAA 0xAA CTL OC
3
66 2
26 6
1 1
1 1 1
4
42
Protocollength
Protocollength
Data
DataProtocol type
Unit: byte
B.4 Link Aggregation
This section describes the basic principle of link aggregation and the relevant frame structure.
B.4.1 Concepts
Link aggregation means bundling multiple physical links that are connected to one piece of equipment. The aggregated links are considered as one link.
As shown in Figure B-9.
Figure B-9 Schematic diagram of link aggregation
traffic
B.4.2 Characteristics
Link aggregation includes manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamic aggregation.
Enhancing Link Availability
In link aggregation, links back up each other dynamically. When a link breaks, the other links can quickly provide a backup. The switching process takes place within the aggregation. It is unrelated with other links.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 228 of 243
Increasing Link Capacity
The aggregation technology can improve the link transmission capability economically. Without upgrading the existing equipment, the user can obtain a data link of larger bandwidth, which is equal to the capacity of a number of physical links. The aggregation module allocates the traffic to different members according to a certain algorithm to realize load balancing at link level.
Aggregation Types
There are three aggregation types: manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamic aggregation.
� Manual aggregation
The aggregation is manually configured, and the port does not run the link aggregation control protocol (LACP).
� Static aggregation
The aggregation is manually configured, and the port runs the LACP.
� Dynamic aggregation
The LACP based on IEEE 802.3ad is used.
B.5 Introduction to MPLS
This section describes the MPLS basic principle and frame structure.
B.5.1 Overview
MPLS is short for multi-protocol label switching.
MPLS is a standard routing and switching technology platform that supports various upper layer protocols and services
The MPLS architecture consists of the following:
� Control plane, which is connectionless and implemented with the current IP network.
� Forwarding plane, also called data plane, is connection-oriented, and takes advantage of the Layer 2 network such as ATM and frame relay.
MPLS uses a short label of fixed length to encapsulate packets, and implements fast forwarding on the data plane. MPLS uses powerful, flexible routing functions of the IP network on the control plane to address various new applications.
MPLS is originated from the Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4), and its core technology can be extended to multiple network protocols, including the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6), Internet Packet Exchange (IPX), Appletalk, DECnet, Connectionless Network Protocol (CLNP). "Multiprotocol" in the MPLS denotes supporting multiple network protocols.
OSN product series support the use of MPLS on IPv4, IPv6 and IPX.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 229 of 243
B.5.2 Encapsulation Format
The MPLS label is usually added before Layer 2 headers and Layer 3 headers. The OptiX OSN equipment supports MPLS encapsulation formats such as MartinioE and MatinioP.
Figure B-10 shows the two encapsulation formats. The encapsulation content is marked in grey.
Figure B-10 MPLS encapsulation format
A A0x8847(0x8848 Ethernet data
6 6 2 N44
DA SA 0x8847 (0x8848 broadcast)
6 6 2
VC
4
Tunnel
4
MartinioE encapsulation format
MartinioP encapsulation format
0x8847(0x8848 ) Ethernet dataVC
4
Tunnel
42 N
VC
4
Tunnel
4
Unit : byte
0x8847 (0x8848 broadcast)
The meanings of the bytes in Figure B-10 are shown in Table B-5.
Table B-5 The meanings of the bytes in the MPLS encapsulation format
Name Meaning
DA Destination address
SA Source address
Tunnel Tunnel label
VC Virtual channel
0x8847 MPLS Martini encapsulation format
0x8848 Broadcast frame
B.6 QinQ Principle
This section describes the QinQ basic principle and frame structure.
B.6.1 Introduction to QinQ
The QinQ is a VLAN stack embedding technology, which complies with the S-VLAN requirements in IEEE 802.1ad. The QinQ technology supplements the VLAN technology that complies with IEEE 802.1q.
The advantages of QinQ technology are as follows:
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 230 of 243
� Expands VLAN and alleviates VLAN resource insufficiency. For example, a VLAN providing 4096 VLAN IDs can provide 4096×4096 VLANs after VLAN stacking.
� Extends LAN service to WAN, connecting the client network to the carrier network and supporting transparent transmission.
B.6.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure
The QinQ data frame involves the types of VLAN labels, which include S-VLAN labels and C-VLAN labels.
VLAN Label Types
IEEE 802.1ad defines two VLAN label types, as shown in Figure B-11.
� Customer VLAN label, defined as C-VLAN.
� Server layer VLAN label, defined as S-VLAN.
Figure B-11 QinQ data frame structure
DestinationMAC
SourceMAC
S-VLAN label C-VLAN label Length/type Data FCS
6 Bytes 6 Bytes 4 Bytes 4 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes
The maximum length of the frame is determined by the port attribute settings of the equipment.
Structure of S-VLAN and C-VLAN
The 4-byte S-VLAN and C-VLAN labels can be further divided into two parts: TPID and TCI, each of which has two bytes.
� TPID
TPID indicates the type of the VLAN label. The TPID of C-VLAN is fixed to 0X8100 and that of S-VLAN is configurable, as shown in Table B-6.
Table B-6 TPID settings
Tag type Name ID
C-VLAN TAG 802.1Q Tag Protocol Type (802.1Q TagType) 0X8100
S-VLAN TAG 802.1Q Service Tag Type (802.1Q S Tag Type) Configurable
C-VLAN tag (C-TAG) is used to identify the customer VLAN and is used on the VLAN Bridge and PEB equipment.
S-VLAN tag (S-TAG) is used to identify the server VLAN and is used on the PB and PEB equipment.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 231 of 243
� TCI
The TCI structure of S-TAG is basically the same as that of C-TAG, as shown in Figure B-12 and Figure B-13. VLAN ID (VID) is still 12 bits, ranging from 0 to 4095. The difference is that S-TAG introduces the concept of Drop Eligible (DE). Priority code point (PCP), used with DE, indicates the priority of the S-TAG frame.
Figure B-12 C-TAG TCI structure
Octets:
Bits:
PCP CFI VID
1 2
8 6 5 4 1 8 1
Figure B-13 S-TAG TCI structure
Octets:
Bits:
PCP DE VID
1 2
8 6 5 4 1 8 1
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 233 of 243
C Glossary
1+1 protection A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge.
1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra traffic signal.
3R Regeneration, Retiming, and Reshaping.
A
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic. It is a protocol within the OSI layer 1. An ATM cell consists of a 5 octet header followed by 48 octets of data.
B
Bandwidth The value numerically equal to the lowest frequency at which the magnitude of the baseband transfer function of an optical fiber decreases to a specified fraction, generally to -3 dB optical (-6 dB electrical), of the zero frequency value. The bandwidth is limited by several mechanisms: mainly modal distortion and chromatic dispersion in multimode fibers.
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply that minimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office. It is sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.
Build-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into the OSN product series. That is, the OSN products can add and drop several wavelengths directly.
C
Congestion The condition that exists in a network, if the capacity required for the instantaneous traffic exceeds the bandwidth available in the network.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 234 of 243
Control plane A set of communicating entities that are responsible for the establishment of connections including set-up, release, supervision and maintenance. A control plane is supported by a signaling network.
Convergence The process of developing a model of the echo path which will be used in the echo estimator to produce the estimate of the circuit echo.
Conversion In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA transforms parts of a message content from one encoded information type to another, or alters a probe so that it appears that the described messages were modified.
D
Distributed transaction
A transaction, parts of which may be carried out in more than one open system.
DNI Dual Node Interconnection. Both ring networks have two nodes that are interconnected with each other. DNI not only provides protection for ring-cross services but also for the failed node of two interconnected nodes. Therefore, it improves the network availability.
E
EPL Ethernet Private Line. An EPL service is a point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.
EPLn Ethernet Private LAN. An EPLn service is a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line. An EVPL service is a service that is both a line service and a virtual private service.
EVPLn Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network. An EVPLn service is a service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service.
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
F
Fairness algorithm A mechanism that enforces fairness among the nodes on the ring. It applies only to LP and excess medium priority traffic coming from the MAC client. Each node is assigned a weight, which allows the user to allocate more ring bandwidth to certain nodes.
FEC Forward error correction. It is a technology used for enhancing the reliability of digital transmission. It can increase the transmission distance and improve the network performance.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 235 of 243
I
IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group.
IMA frame The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group.
IMA group Group of links at one end used to establish an IMA virtual link to other end.
IMA sublayer Sublayer part of the physical layer that is located between the interface specific Transmission Convergence (TC) sublayer and the ATM layer.
IMA virtual link Virtual link established between two IMA units over a number of physical links (IMA group).
ASON service Service that is configured directly by the T2000. The service within the transmission network is requested by the T2000 and then created by the control plane of the NE through signaling.
IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows the TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.
L
Loopback The fault of each path on the optical fiber can be located by setting the loopback for each path of the line. There are three kinds of loopback modes: No loopback, outloop, inloop.
M
MSP Multiplex Section Protection. The MSP function provides the capability for switching a signal from a working section to a protection section.
Multiplexer An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, where the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels are fixed.
O
Orderwire It establishes the voice communication among the operators and maintenance engineers working in each working station.
Overhead information
Auxiliary Channel Overhead Information is information that may be transferred by an optical network layer, but which does not have to be associated with a particular connection. An example of such an auxiliary channel is a data communications channel used for the purposes of transferring management data between management entities. These management entities are not trail termination and adaptation functions.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 236 of 243
P
Paired slot Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty or offline, the overheads can be passed through between the paired slots by using the directly connected overhead bus. When two SDH boards form an MSP ring, the boards need to be inserted in paired slots so that the K bytes can be passed through.
R
RPR Resilient Packet Ring. A metropolitan area network (MAN) technology supporting data transfer among stations interconnected in a dual-ring configuration.
Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
S
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.
SNCP SubNetwork Connection Protection. A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
SNCMP Subnetwork Connection Multi-protection. The source broadcasts services to multiple paths, and the sink determines which service needs to be received according to the service priority and the service quality.
SNCTP Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection. It provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all the services in the working path are switched to the protection path.
SLA Service Level Agreement. A negotiated agreement between an end user and the service provider. Its significance varies according to the service offerings. The SLA may include a number of attributes such as, but not limited to, traffic contract, availability, performance, encryption, authentication, pricing and billing mechanism .
Service plane The service plane comprises: a) service presentation functionality being presented to the end user; b) service implementation aspects with which the end user interacts. For example, service invocation, control service level agreement function. The service presentation and service implementation aspects use the totality of the transfer capabilities including control and management functionalities.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 237 of 243
T
TPS Tributary Protection Switching. A function provided by the equipment, which is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
TCM Tandem Connection Monitor. In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU management layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality of the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section).
Timeslot Single timeslot on a E1 digital interface—that is, a 64-kbps, synchronous, full-duplex data channel, typically used for a single voice connection.
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 239 of 243
D Acronyms and Abbreviations
This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual.
A
ABR Available Bit Rate
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
B
BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply System
BPA Optical Booster & Pre-amplifier Unit
C
CAR Committed Access Rate
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CC Continuity Check
CF Compact Flash
CMI Coded Mark Inversion
CR-LDP Constrained Route Label Distribution Protocol
CSPF Constrained Shortest Path First
D
DCC Data Communication Channels
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 240 of 243
DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DDN Digital Data Network
DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EPL Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN
ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
F
FC Fiber Channel
FE Fast Ethernet
FEC Forward Error Correction
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GMPLS General Multiprotocol Label Switching
H
HDB3 High Density Bipolar of order 3 code
HDLC High level Data Link Control
I
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 241 of 243
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
L
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAN Local Area Network; Local Area Network
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB Loopback
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LPT Link State Path Through
LSP Label Switch Path
M
MAC Media Access Control
MADM Multi Add/Drop Multiplexer
MCF Message Communication Function
MLM Multi-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
N
NEBS Network Equipment-Building System
nrt-VBR Non-Real Time Variable Bite rate
NS Network Side
NSF Non-interrupted Service Forwarding
O
OADM Optical Add/drop Multiplexer
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 242 of 243
OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OAM&P Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provision
OSP OptiX Software Platform
OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer
P
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PE Provider Edge
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
Q
QoS Quality of Service
R
RPR Resilient Packet Ring
RSTP Rapid Span Tree Protocol
rt-VBR Real Time Variable Bite rate
RSVP-TE Resource Reservation Setup Protocol with Traffic-Engineering Extensions
S
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP Small Form Pluggable
SLA Service Level Agreement
SLM Single-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection
SNCMP Subnetwork Connection Multi-protection
SNCTP Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
STP Span Tree Protocol
T
TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring
TPS Tributary Protection Switching
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008
Product Description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29) Commercial in Confidence Page 243 of 243
U
UBR Unspecified Bit Rate
V
VC Virtual Channel
VCC Virtual Channel Connection
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VP Virtual Path
VPC Virtual Path Connection
VPN Virtual Private Network
W
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WTR Wait-to-Restore